JP2020104002A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A drawing list to which required information for displaying images is set is provided from a performance CPU 82 to a performance LSI 85. A plurality of drawing lists may be provided to display images corresponding to one update timing. In each of respective display devices 41, 43, 44, one drawing list in that image data to be used are set intensively may be provided. When the drawing list is provided, a prior transfer control part 94 reads image data designated in the drawing list from a memory module 83 to a VRAM 86. In the above configuration, an image is displayed to prevent a player to easily recognize rotary operation of the sub-display devices 43, 44 in a situation where the sub-display devices 43, 44 are performing rotary operation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-261415, A

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-illustrated circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a predetermined display means for displaying an image,
Displacement drive control means for displacing the predetermined display means,
Display control means for performing display control of the predetermined display means,
Equipped with
In the situation where the predetermined display means is performing a predetermined displacement operation, the display control means displays on the predetermined display means a displacement corresponding image in which it is difficult for the player to identify that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement operation. It is characterized in that it is provided with a displacement corresponding control means for displaying.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of (a)-(j) main display device. (A), (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents on the display surface of the main display device. It is a schematic diagram of a variable display unit for explaining the first sub display device and the second sub display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the movement mode of each sub-display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for big hit generation lottery, etc. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by the master MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing performed by distribution side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed by the distribution side MPU. It is the explanation drawing in order to explain the electric constitution of the production control control equipment. It is the flowchart which shows the V interruption processing which is executed with the production CPU. It is the flowchart which shows the task processing for the display control which is executed with the production CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining various fields of a register used when a 2D control part and a 3D control part perform drawing processing. (A)-(c) It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the drawing list for 2D. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the (a), (b) 3D drawing list. It is a flow chart which shows 2D drawing processing performed by a 2D control part. It is a flow chart which shows 3D drawing processing performed by a 3D control part. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which drawing data is created in accordance with execution of 3D drawing processing. 6A to 6C are time charts for explaining the timing at which the drawing data is created and the timing at which the image data is transferred in advance. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a storage area for before transfer and a storage area for after transfer. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a prior transfer area, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an identification information counter. It is an explanatory view for explaining a search table. (A) ~ (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state where the address information of the drawing list and the address ID of the search table are rewritten. It is the flowchart which shows the drawing list output processing which is executed with the production CPU. (A) to (e) The image data necessary for starting the game use effect is read at least in the advance transfer area at a timing when the next game effect can be started. It is a time chart which shows a situation. It is a flowchart which shows the prior transfer process performed by the prior transfer control part. 6 is a flowchart showing a rewriting process of address information executed by a pre-transfer control unit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a file table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a relation between VRAM and an index area. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an index table. It is a flow chart which shows transfer execution processing performed by a transfer controller. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of one drawing list in which image data corresponding to each display device is aggregated and set. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for (a), (b) display control. It is the flowchart which shows the production processing of the drawing list which is executed with the production CPU. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for outputting an image signal to each sub-display device. (A) to (e) A state in which one drawing data is created to display an image of one frame on each of the sub display devices, and each sub display device using the one drawing data FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which an image for one frame is displayed in each of the above. 8A to 8D are time charts showing how an image signal is output to each display device. 7 is a flowchart showing a writing process executed by a 2D control unit. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process in a drawing area for sub-display executed by a 2D control unit. It is a flow chart which shows signal output processing performed by the 2nd display circuit. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of an execution target table for display control in a displacement effect period. (A), (b) It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the right-handed notification image displayed on each display device. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the data memorize|stored in the memory module, (b), (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content displayed as a right-hand side alert image on the sub side. .. 9A to 9D are time charts showing how the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image on the sub side is changed according to the displacement state of the sub display device. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing for the right hitting notification which is executed with the production CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the effect using the image for (a)-(e) rotation periods. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing of rotary movement indicator which is executed with CPU for production. (A) ~ (d) is an explanatory view for explaining a method of creating image data for displaying an image for a rotation period in a pachinko machine design stage, and (e) describes the contents of data stored in a memory module. It is explanatory drawing for doing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the phenomenon used as the target of an abnormality notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of (a)-(e) abnormality alerting|reporting image. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the abnormality alerting|reporting image in the period when (a)-(d) production|generation which displaces a sub-display apparatus is performed. It is the flowchart which shows the correspondence processing of the information command which is executed with the production CPU. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing for information which is executed with the production CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the data stored in the memory module. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of normal moving image data, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of special moving image data. (A) ~ (c) is a time chart showing how the decoding process of moving image data is executed during the period during which an image is displayed using the attached image data. It is the flowchart which shows the use setting processing of the animated picture data which is executed with the production CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process performed with a moving image decoder. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a sub-display drawing area in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing data synthetic|combination process for sub displays performed by a 3D control part. 9 is a flowchart showing an address information rewriting process executed by a pre-transfer control unit in the third embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the drawing list output processing which is executed with the production CPU in 4th execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the prior transfer process performed by the prior transfer control part.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. .. The gaming machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be turned forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation front end side in front view.

In addition, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating front end, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 in a locked state, and The door frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that the door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

A game board 21 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 21.

An inner rail portion 22 and an outer rail portion 23 are attached to the game board 21 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 22 and the outer rail portion 23 guide the guiding means. The guide rail as is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 21 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail. The game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball by manually operating the launching operation device 24 provided on the front door frame 14.

The game board 21 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, etc. are provided in each opening. ing.

Even if the ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 occur, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Regarding the number of prize balls, specifically, when a ball enters the first operation port 33 or a ball enters the second operation port 34, three prize balls are paid out. , When 10 balls are paid to the general winning opening 31, 15 prize balls are paid out, and when 15 balls are paid to the special electric prize winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. To be executed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls may be smaller in the second operating port 34 than in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may be the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an outlet 21a is provided at the bottom of the game board 21, and game balls that have not entered various winning openings are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 21a. Further, on the game board 21, a large number of nails 21b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the outlet 21a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35. Entering a game ball into is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 21. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, the both operating ports 33, 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second working port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the universal electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the universal electric object 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operation port 34 in the downflow direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through-gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is triggered by winning the prize in the through gate 35, and a public figure display of the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area in the game area PA where the game balls do not pass. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power combination opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal graphic display portion 38a is ended, the operation shifts to the universal electric open state. In the general electric open state, the general electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

The universal figure display section 38a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device is provided. , Other types of display devices such as CRTs or dot matrix displays. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the universal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the universal figure unit 38, a universal figure hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal figure display section 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the through gate 35 is four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the universal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through a display effect on the main display device 41 of the special drawing unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special drawing unit 37 is provided with a special drawing display portion 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface of the main display device 41. In the special figure display portion 37a, the jackpot occurrence lottery is triggered by the winning of the first working opening 33 or the winning of the second working opening 34, thereby performing variable display of the pattern. Then, as a stop result after the variable display of the pattern is performed, a display corresponding to the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery is performed. The special figure display portion 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , Other types of display devices such as CRTs or dot matrix displays. As the picture displayed on the special figure display portion 37a, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors are displayed. A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure pending display portion 37b.

In detail about the main display device 41, the main display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a production control device 80 described later. The main display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. May be.

In the main display device 41, when the variable display of the pattern is performed on the special symbol display portion 37a based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the variable display of the symbol is performed accordingly. Be seen. That is, when variable display is performed on the special figure display unit 37a, variable display is performed on the main display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in a game game in which the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery is a jackpot result, symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the activated line preset in the main display device 41.

The display contents of the main display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. 3(a) to 3(j) are diagrams individually showing symbols which are variably displayed on the main display device 41, and FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b) are display surfaces of the main display device 41. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 3(a) to 3(j), the symbols, which are a kind of the symbols, are nine types of main symbols to which the numbers “1” to “9” are respectively attached, and shell-shaped symbols. And a sub-pattern consisting of. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by adding numbers "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface of the main display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and configured by 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), on the display surface, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display surface. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number on any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) were assigned. The main symbol corresponds to the "non-specific symbol". When the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same specific symbols or the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result described later, the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and thereafter, An explicit video is displayed.

The manner of variable display of symbols on the main display device 41 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the main display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

Further, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started on the special figure display portion 37a and the main display device 41, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. Corresponds to one game game.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 2, when the jackpot is generated in the jackpot occurrence lottery based on the winning of the first working opening 33 or the winning of the second working opening 34, it is possible to win the special electric prize winning device 32. To the open/close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 32 has a big winning opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 21, and also has an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the big winning opening. The open/close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and when the game is transferred to the open/close execution mode in the internal lottery, the game balls can be switched to an open state in which prizes can be won. It has become. By the way, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that in the closed state, the winning is not impossible, but the winning state may be less likely to occur than in the opened state. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is executed on the main display device 41.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. In the variable display unit 36, the center frame 42 provided so as to surround the main display device 41 is projected forward of the pachinko machine 10 beyond the surface of the game board 21, so that the game area PA is variable. An upper area that is an area above a predetermined height position of the display unit 36, a left area that is an area that is continuous with the upper area below and is left of the variable display unit 36, and an area that is below the upper area. At the right side region which is continuous to the right side of the variable display unit 36, and the lower side region which is continuous below the variable display unit 36 with respect to each of the left side region and the right side region. It is divided into In this case, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided in the lower region. Further, the first operating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage 42a formed in the center frame 42, and the game balls discharged from the center of the stage 42a to the outside of the variable display unit 36 enter the first operating port 33. At the same time, the entrance portion of the guide passage that allows the game ball to be guided onto the stage 42a is formed so as to allow the game ball to enter from the left side area. Therefore, when performing the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the left side region, to the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 than when performing the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the right side region. It becomes easy for game balls to enter. On the other hand, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right area. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, if the shooting operation has been performed so that the game ball flows down the left side area until then, it is necessary to change the shooting operation mode to a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side area. There is.

Here, the variable display unit 36 is provided with a first sub display device 43 and a second sub display device 44 in addition to the main display device 41. The first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the variable display unit 36 for explaining the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44.

Each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by an effect control device described later. The first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be other display devices having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be a dot matrix display. Further, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are not limited to the configuration in which the same type of display device is used. The first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 may use different types of display devices such as one being a liquid crystal display device and the other being a dot matrix display device.

The first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are display devices having the same shape, and the resolution of the display surface, the shape of the display surface, and the size of the display surface are the same. The display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub display device 44 are both rectangular. The display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub display device 44 are both narrower than the display surface of the main display device 41, and further, the display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device. The total area of the display surface of the device 44 and the display surface of the main display device 41 is also smaller. Further, the dimension of the long side of the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 is shorter than the dimension of any side of the rectangular display surface of the main display device 41, and the long side of the display surface of the second sub-display device 44. Is smaller than the dimension of any side of the rectangular display surface of the main display device 41. As a result, even if the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are provided separately from the main display device 41, the player's attention to the main display device 41 is extremely lowered. It is possible to prevent that.

Both the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are arranged in front of the display surface of the main display device 41. The first sub display device 43 is provided with a first drive unit 45 for sliding and rotating the first sub display device 43 in front of the main display device 41, and the second sub display device 44 is provided with the first drive unit 45. Is provided with a second drive unit 46 for sliding and rotating the second sub display device 44 in front of the main display device 41.

The first drive unit 45 is provided on the back side of the center frame 42 above the rectangular opening 42b that exposes the display surface of the main display device 41 in the center frame 42 toward the front of the game board 21. The second drive unit 46 is provided on the back side of the center frame 42 below the opening 42b. That is, the center frame 42 is provided with a pair of upper and lower drive units 45 and 46.

The first drive unit 45 and the second drive unit 46 have the same configuration. Specifically, each drive unit 45, 46 is capable of reciprocating in the horizontal direction along with the drive rails 45a, 46a extending in the horizontal direction and the sub-display devices 43, 44. The slide drive motors 45c and 46c that enable the supporting members 45b and 46b that support them to reciprocate in the vertical direction, and the sub display devices 43 and 44 that are rotatably supported by the supporting members 45b and 46b, are rotationally driven. The rotary drive motors 45d and 46d are provided. The sub display devices 43 and 44 are supported by rotary drive motors 45d and 46d so that their display surfaces face the front of the pachinko machine 10 in the same direction as the display surface of the main display device 41. By turning 45d and 46d into a driving state, the pachinko machine 10 rotates about the front-rear direction as a rotation axis.

The support members 45b and 46b have a long plate shape, and are mounted on the slide drive motors 45c and 46c such that their longitudinal directions are vertical. In this case, the combination of the first sub-display device 43 and the rotation drive motor 45d is mounted on the lower end side of the support member 45b of the first drive unit 45, and the second sub-display device 43 and the rotary drive motor 45d of the second drive unit 46 are mounted on the upper end side of the second member. A combination of the sub display device 44 and the rotary drive motor 46d is mounted. When the slide drive motors 45c and 46c are brought into a drive state in which the support members 45b and 46b are moved in the vertical direction, the support members 45b and 46b are moved in the vertical direction, and accordingly, the support members 45b and 46b are integrated. The combination of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 and the rotation drive motors 45d and 46d that are moving in the vertical direction. Further, the slide drive motors 45c and 46c move laterally along the drive rails 45a and 46a, so that the slide drive motors 45c and 46c move laterally, and the slide drive motor 45c accordingly. , 46c integrated with the sub-display devices 43, 44, support members 45b, 46b, and rotary drive motors 45d, 46d move laterally.

The state shown in FIG. 5 is a state in which each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is arranged at the initial position. In this case, the first sub display device 43 is arranged in the horizontally long posture on the upper side of the opening 42b of the center frame 42, and the lower half of the display surface of the first sub display device 43 is the display of the main display device 41. The front half of the surface is exposed from the opening 42b and the upper half is hidden behind the center frame 42. Further, the second sub display device 44 is also disposed on the lower side of the opening 42b of the center frame 42 in a horizontally long posture, and the upper half of the display surface of the second sub display device 44 is the display surface of the main display device 41. The front half is exposed from the opening 42b and the lower half is hidden behind the center frame 42. As described above, in a situation in which both the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are arranged at the initial position, the two sub display devices 43 and 44 have a positional relationship in which they are vertically separated. Further, in a situation where both sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the horizontal positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are the same. As a result, the entire lower surface of the first sub display device 43 faces the entire upper surface of the second sub display device 44.

FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of the movement mode of each sub display device 43, 44. The slide drive motors 45c and 46c are driven to move the support members 45b and 46b downward in a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial position, thereby maintaining the horizontal orientation. The first sub display device 43 moves downward and the second sub display device 44 moves upward while maintaining the horizontally long posture. Then, the sub display devices 43, 44 are made to approach each other to a position where the lower surface of the first sub display device 43 in the horizontal position and the upper surface of the second sub display device 44 in the horizontal position face each other at a short distance. By moving vertically in the vertical direction, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. In this case, the display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub display device 44 are arranged so as to be apparently continuous, and one surface of a square shape or a rectangular shape is formed by these display surfaces. Will be done. This position is the first juxtaposed position. At the first juxtaposed position, the boundary between the display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub display device 44 exists so as to extend in the lateral direction. A detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is arranged at the first juxtaposed position is provided, and the distribution control device 70, which will be described later, displays the detection result of the detection sensor. Based on this, it is specified that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first juxtaposed position, and the drive states of the slide drive motors 45c and 46c are stopped.

In the state of FIG. 6A, the slide drive motor 45c of the first drive unit 45 enters a drive state in which the first sub-display device 43 is moved to the right and downward, and the rotary drive motor 45d of the first drive unit 45 moves. The first sub display device 43 is driven to rotate clockwise, and the slide drive motor 46c of the second drive unit 46 is driven to move the second sub display device 44 leftward and upward. The rotation drive motor 46d of the drive unit 46 is brought into a drive state for rotating the second sub display device 44 in the clockwise direction, so that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are placed in the second juxtaposed position as shown in FIG. 6B. Will be placed in the At the second juxtaposed position, each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 has a vertically long posture, and the left surface of the first sub-display device 43 having the vertically long posture and the right surface of the second sub-display device 44 having the vertically long posture are close to each other. They will face each other at a distance. In this case, the display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub display device 44 are arranged so as to be apparently continuous, and one surface of a square shape or a rectangular shape is formed by these display surfaces. Will be done. At the second juxtaposed position, the boundary between the display surface of the first sub display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub display device 44 exists so as to extend in the vertical direction. A detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is arranged in the second juxtaposed position is provided, and the distribution control device 70, which will be described later, displays the detection result of the detection sensor. Based on this, it is specified that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the second juxtaposed position, and the drive states of the slide drive motors 45c and 46c and the rotation drive motors 45d and 46d are stopped. In addition to the first side-by-side position and the second side-by-side position, a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the initial position and each intermediate position described later is provided, and the distribution control device 70 described later detects each detection. The drive states of the slide drive motors 45c and 46c and the rotation drive motors 45d and 46d are stopped based on the detection result of the sensor.

As a position where each sub-display device 43, 44 is arranged, in addition to the initial position, the first juxtaposed position, and the second juxtaposed position, the initial position shown in FIG. 5 and the first juxtaposed position shown in FIG. There is a position where each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is arranged at an intermediate position from the installation position. In addition to that, there is a position where the first sub display device 43 moves to the right and the second sub display device 44 moves to the left from the second juxtaposed position shown in FIG. 6B. ing. Each of these intermediate positions has a positional relationship in which the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are vertically separated from each other in the case of the former, and the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 in the case of the latter. The sub display device 44 and the sub display device 44 are laterally separated from each other. Further, in a state where the first sub display device 43 is arranged at the initial position, the second sub display device 44 corresponds to a position corresponding to the first juxtaposed position, a position corresponding to the second juxtaposed position, and each intermediate position. The second sub-display device 44 is placed at the initial position and the first sub-display device 43 is placed at the position corresponding to the first side-by-side position and the second side-by-side position. It may be arranged at a position corresponding to the corresponding position and each intermediate position.

When the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at positions other than the initial position, the support members 45b and 46b are exposed from the opening 42b of the center frame 42. In this case, since the support members 45b and 46b are formed to be colorless and transparent, the support members 45b and 46b can be made inconspicuous, and the image displayed on the main display device 41 can be supported. The members 45b and 46b can prevent the members from being hidden.

As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 21 having the above configuration. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided with a window portion 51 that allows almost the entire game area PA to be viewed from the front. The window 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, and the game area PA is provided from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. If it is visible, it may be formed to be colored and transparent.

A display light emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting a sound effect according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulge portion 55 and a lower bulge portion 56 which bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launch mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 55a.

A main control device 60, a distribution control device 70, and a production control device 80 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13. Further, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism section including a payout device 68, a power supply and firing control device 65, and a payout control device 66. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 60>
The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. In the main controller 60, a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening is provided to the substrate box that accommodates the main control substrate 61 or the like, or a trace structure for leaving the trace of the opening is provided. You may Examples of the trace means include a constitution of a joint portion (a caulking portion) that requires a plurality of case bodies that form the substrate box to be inseparably joined and requires a predetermined portion to be broken during the separation, and an adhesive layer to be adhered when peeled off. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off when left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, it is conceivable that an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the substrate box.

An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built in.

As the ROM 63, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control/calculation unit, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip. It may be installed.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply and firing control device 65 is connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The power supply/launch control device 65 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the operating power is supplied to the main control board 61 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. By the way, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 61 but also to other devices such as a payout control device 66 and a performance control device 80 described later.

A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 62 and the power supply/launch control device 65. In this case, the power failure monitoring board monitors the occurrence of the power failure, and when the occurrence of the power failure is confirmed, the power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 62, so that the MPU 62 executes the processing for the power failure. It becomes possible to do.

Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As a part of the various sensors, the detection is provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the winning-corresponding ball portion such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 62 makes a prize determination (ball determination) to each of the ball entering portions. In addition, the MPU 62 executes the jackpot occurrence lottery and the jackpot result type lottery based on the winning of the first operating mouth 33 and the second operating mouth 34, and also the reach generating lottery for each game time and the determination lottery of the variable display time. To do.

Here, a configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 62 will be described.

The MPU 62 uses various counter information at the time of playing a game, and performs jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of special figure display portion 37a, setting of symbol display of main display device 41, setting of display of general figure display portion 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a winning random number counter C1 used in the jackpot occurrence lottery, and a jackpot type counter C2 used in determining a jackpot type such as a 15R probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the main display device 41 fluctuates and deviates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the special figure display portion 37a and the main display device 41. The variable type counter CS for determining the variable display time in is used. Further, the general electric utility article release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not to put the general electric utility article 34a in the second operation port 34 into the electric utility state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in the lottery counter buffer 64a.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0". The information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved storage area 64b as an acquisition information storage unit when a prize is paid to the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34. Stored in.

The hold storage area 64b includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and the winning history of the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 is recorded. In addition, the numerical information of each of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

In the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winning in the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1→the second holding area RE2 Numerical value information is stored in time series in the order of →third holding area RE3→fourth holding area RE4. Since the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this way, the winning history of the game balls to the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. .. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display portion 37a, and at the start of one game time. Is judged on the basis of various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

For details of each counter, the hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and then return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and is stored in the reserved storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the ROM 63 as a win/loss table. As the win/loss table, a win/loss table for the low probability mode and a win/loss table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the jackpot generation lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that is a big win is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/loss table is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big win is 20. It should be noted that the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary as long as the winning probability of the high-probability mode is higher than that of the low-probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by "1" within a range of 0 to 29, and then returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) a mode of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the jackpot occurrence lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode, and (3) after the opening/closing execution mode. A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating three conditions of the support mode of the second working port 34 in the general electric accessory 34a.

As a mode of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency is set so that the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the special winning opening is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds have passed or the special winning opening is won. It is continued until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the big winning opening is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec has passed or the number of winnings to the big winning opening. Will continue until there are six.

In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the firing operation device 24 is being operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 67 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. To be done. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

In addition, in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of times of opening and closing the big winning opening, the opening time for one opening and the maximum number of winnings per opening are higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode. The value is not limited to the above value and may be arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is high.

However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the special electricity winning device 32 does not substantially occur. It is good to do. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit winning number is set shorter than the opening time for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, the game ball is set for one opening. It is also possible to set the product of the firing cycle and the upper limit winning number to be set longer than the opening time. In addition, even if the interval between shooting game balls and the opening time of one big winning opening is not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which no prize is won in the special electric prize winning device 32.

As a support mode of the second working port 34 in the electric utility object 34a, when comparing the situation in which the game balls are continuously fired in the same manner with respect to the game area PA, the second working port 34 has a normal mode. The low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a is opened per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of being in the electric-role open state winning in the electric-role auditors open lottery using the general-use auditors open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). ), the high frequency support mode sets the number of times that the general electric officer 34a is in the open state when it is elected to open the electric role more frequently than in the low frequency support mode. The opening time of is set to be long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric power combination open state is elected and the general electric utility object 34a is opened a plurality of times, from the time when one open state ends to the time when the next open state starts. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter time than the low frequency support mode, which is the minimum secured time for the next electric auditors' item open lottery to be performed after one electric auditors item open lottery is performed. Is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operation port 33 is higher than in the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than the first operation port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a prize is generated in the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls he/she holds. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for increasing the frequency of being in the electric power open state per unit time in the high frequency support mode is higher than that in the low frequency support mode, and is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It may be configured such that the probability of winning the electric role open state in is increased. In addition, a secured time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (for example, on the public figure display portion 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time to be executed) are prepared, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter securing time can be selected more easily or the average securing time is set shorter than in the low frequency supporting mode. May be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the time of opening is increased, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (that is, , Shortening the one-time fluctuation display time in the public figure display portion 38a), shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability, apply any one condition or a condition of any combination. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 63 as a distribution table. Then, as the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result, and a 15R certainty variation jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is the jackpot result in which the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. is there. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes the jackpot state winning, and the jackpot state is shifted accordingly.

The 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. .. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes the jackpot state winning, and the jackpot state is shifted accordingly.

The normal game state in relation to each of the above-mentioned game states means a state in which the big hit occurrence lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” correspond to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” correspond to the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by "1" within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and then returned to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating opening 33 or the second operating opening 34.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect on the main display device 41. The expected effect is provided with the main display device 41 capable of performing variable display of the symbols, and the stop display result after the variable display is specially displayed in the game time in which the opening/closing execution mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 is the high frequency winning mode. In the resulting gaming machine, at the stage before the variable display of the symbols on the main display device 41 is started and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, the player is made to think that the special display result is likely to be the variable display state. Is a display state for.

Two types of expected effects are set: the above-mentioned reach effect and a notice effect for expecting the occurrence of the reach effect or the occurrence of the special display result in a stage before the reach effect occurs.

In the reach effect, the symbols are stopped and displayed for a part of the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41, so that a combination of the jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode can be achieved. It includes a display state in which a reach symbol combination that may be established is displayed, and a variable display of symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol columns in that state. Further, while displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and by performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, , Which includes reducing or displaying a combination of reach symbols and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface to perform a reach effect.

Regarding the reach effect, specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbols, a combination of the jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode on the preset effective line in the display surface of the main display device 41. The reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the combination of reach symbols that may be satisfied, and the variable display of the symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence under the situation where the reach line is formed.

Explaining the display contents of FIG. 4 in detail, first, the variable display of symbols is finished in the upper symbol row Z1, and the variable display of symbols is finished in the lower symbol row Z3. Reach lines are formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach lines are formed, variable display of symbols is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Being given will be a reach production. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of symbols is ended.

In the notice production, in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 since the variable display of the symbols is started on the display surface of the main display device 41, or a part of the symbol columns. In a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, a background image having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and a pattern on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes are also included. Such advance notice production can occur in both game times when the reach production is performed and when the reach production is not performed, but the case where the reach production is performed is higher than the case where the reach production is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach effect is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game time when the game is switched to the open/close execution mode. Further, in the game time that does not shift to the open/close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing refers to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 63, in response to the occurrence of the reach effect. Is executed if On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to give the advance notice effect is made not by the main control device 60 but by the distribution control device 70.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation display time in the special figure display portion 37a and the symbol variation display time in the main display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once every time a timer interrupt process described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process described later. Then, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the fluctuation display on the special figure display portion 37a and determining the fluctuation pattern at the time when the main display device 41 starts the fluctuation of the symbol. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

The general electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and then return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric accessory release counter C4 is updated periodically and is stored in the electric power holding area 64c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric utility object 34a in the open state based on the stored value of the general electric utility object release counter C4.

As shown in FIG. 7, the output side of the MPU 62 is connected with a payout control device 66 and a power supply and firing control device 65. To the payout control device 66, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted based on a result of a prize determination to the prize-corresponding ball portion. The payout control device 66 causes the payout device 68 to perform payout control of prize balls and loan balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60. A firing permission command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the power supply and firing control device 65 based on that the firing operation device 24 is being operated. The power supply and launch controller 65 drives the game ball launch mechanism 67 to launch the game ball toward the game area PA based on the launch permission command received from the main controller 60.

To the output side of the MPU 62, the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a are connected, and the MPU 62 directly controls the display of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. That is, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed in the MPU 62 at each game time. Further, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly indicated, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the general figure display unit 38a.

To the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric prize winning drive unit that opens and closes the opening and closing door of the special electric prize winning device 32, and a general electric prize object driving unit that opens and closes the general electric prize object 34a of the second operating port 34 are connected. .. That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the special electric winning drive unit so that the special winning opening is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electric utility object 34a is elected in the open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the general electric object driving unit so that the general electric object 34a is opened and closed. Further, the distribution control device 70 is connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and various production commands are transmitted to the distribution control device 70.

Here, the processing executed by the MPU 62 will be described. The processing of the MPU 62 is roughly classified into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process is activated, and a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses without waiting for the next process. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and initial setting of the main display device 41 are completed. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 64 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 62 is set.

Then, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply and firing control device 65 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 64. Determine whether. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the stored and held data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 64 is cleared. Then, it progresses to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch is not pressed, on condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, the process of step S108 is not executed and step S109 is executed. Proceed to. In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 64 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the distribution control device 70 in order to recognize the current game state. To do.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual process of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing this irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is irregularly executed.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In a succeeding step S111, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and at the same time, a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 64, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec cycle). First, in step S201, a power failure information storage process is executed. In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed.

In subsequent step S202, lottery random number update processing is executed. In the lottery random number updating process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility article release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical value information is sequentially read from the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility open counter C4, and the processing of adding 1 to each of the read numerical value information is executed. After that, a process of overwriting the counter of the reading source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter updating process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In a succeeding step S205, a fraud detection process of monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraudulent monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, "1" is set to the game stop flag provided in the RAM 64.

In a succeeding step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. When a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing from step S207 is executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to various drive units is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, output of the drive signal to the special electric prize winning drive unit is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set, the information is set. Stop the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the universal utility product 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the information for starting the output of the drive signal to the universal utility product drive unit and switching to the closed state. If is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes.

In a succeeding step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from the respective winning detection sensors are read, and whether or not there is a winning in the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first working opening 33, the second working opening 34, and the through gate 35. Executes the process to specify.

In a succeeding step S210, a timer updating process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 64 is executed. In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may be configured.

In a succeeding step S211, a firing control process for controlling the firing of the game ball is executed. In the situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 24 is continued, as described above, one game ball is fired at a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec.

In a succeeding step S212, as input state monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208.

In a succeeding step S213, special figure special electric power control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of opening/closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special electric power control process, when a prize is generated in the first working opening 33 or the second working opening 34 in a situation where the number of pieces of holding information stored in the holding storage area 64b is less than the upper limit number, A process of sequentially storing the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in the pending storage area 64b is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, whether or not the holding information corresponds to the jackpot win, provided that the holding information is not stored during the game play and the opening/closing execution mode and the jackpot occurrence occurs. If it corresponds to the lottery processing and the jackpot winning, the sorting determination processing for determining which jackpot result the holding information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, not only the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the sorting determination process, but if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot win, whether the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence or not. Reach determination processing for determining is performed, and processing for selecting the variation display time of the game time is performed using the numerical value information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In this case, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of the big hit, the big hit type, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence is read out from the ROM 63, and from the read variable display time table and the numerical information of the change type counter CS at the timing, Determine the variation display time of the game times. Then, the variation command including the information of the variation display time of the determined game times and the type command including the information of the game result are transmitted to the distribution control device 70, and the variation of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is also transmitted. Start the display. As a result, one game time is started, and the effect for game time is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the main display device 41. Further, the MPU 62 starts measuring the fluctuation display time when the fluctuation command and the type command are transmitted.

Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the variation display time corresponding to the game time has elapsed during the execution of one game time, the special figure display portion 37a presents the jackpot occurrence lottery process and distribution of the current game time. The stop result corresponding to the result of the determination process is displayed, and measurement of the finalized display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is started. Then, the state in which the stop result is displayed on the special figure display portion 37a is maintained for the fixed display time. When the confirmed display time has elapsed, if the current game time corresponds to the miss result, a new game time is started on condition that the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 64b. Execute the process. If the suspension information is not stored, the system waits until the suspension information is newly acquired.

On the other hand, if the current game number corresponds to the jackpot result, a process for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the distribution control device 70. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an opening command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the distribution control device 70, and a closing command indicating that the round game is ended is transmitted to the distribution control device 70. In addition, in the special figure special electric power control process, in order to set the jackpot occurrence lottery mode and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode while transmitting the ending command indicating the end of the opening/closing execution mode to the distribution control device 70. The process of is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, an opening period is generated over a period of, for example, 3 seconds, and an effect that allows the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode has been generated in this opening period is executed. After that, the round game in which the opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 is executed is executed a predetermined number of times. Then, after a predetermined number of round games have been executed, an ending period occurs over a period of, for example, 5 seconds, and an effect is executed to make it possible for the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode ends in this ending period. ..

After executing the special figure special electric power control processing of step S213 in the timer interruption processing, the general figure normal electric power control processing is executed in step S214. In the general/universal/universal control process, a process for acquiring the suspension information on the general/universal side is executed when a prize is paid to the through gate 35, and the suspension information on the general/universal side is stored. Then, the release information is determined to be released, and the processing for performing the effect for the universal figure is executed when the release determination is triggered. In addition, based on the result of the open determination, a process of opening and closing the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed.

In a succeeding step S215, output information for reflecting the increased/decreased number of the hold information corresponding to the special figure display portion 37a in the special figure hold display portion 37b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214. At the same time, the output information is set so that the increase/decrease number of the hold information corresponding to the universal figure display section 38a is reflected on the universal figure hold display section 38b. In step S215, the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display portion 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display content of the general figure display portion 38a is changed. Set the output information for updating.

In a succeeding step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 66 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S217, payout output processing for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed. In a succeeding step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and the end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed. After that, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Distribution control device 70>
Next, the distribution control device 70 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 7, the distribution control device 70 executes effects performed by the various display devices 41, 43, 44, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 based on the command received from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Based on the control of the distribution control board 71 having a function of determining the content, and the distribution control board 71 and the effect control device 80 described later, to the various drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. And an output integration board 72 having a function of collectively outputting the drive signals of

The distribution control board 71 includes an MPU 73. The MPU 73 includes a ROM 74 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 73 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 74. A RAM 75, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built in.

As the ROM 74, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and that does not require external power supply for storage is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 74 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control/calculation unit, the ROM 74, and the RAM 75 are integrated into one chip is not indispensable, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip. It may be configured to be mounted.

The MPU 73 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 73. The output control board 80 is connected to the output side of the MPU 73, and the output integration board 72 is also connected. Incidentally, the electrical connection between the distribution control board 71 and the output integration board 72 is performed by the distribution side connector 76a provided on the distribution control board 71 and the output integration side connector 76b provided on the output integration board 72. Are connected without interposing a signal line. The distribution side connector 76a and the output integration side connector 76b are electrically connected in a detachable state.

The output integrated board 72 includes a motor drive circuit 77 and a harness connector 78. The motor drive circuit 77 includes a slide drive motor 45c and a rotation drive motor 45d for moving the first sub display device 43, and a second sub display device, based on the drive data output from the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71. It is a circuit for outputting a drive signal to a slide drive motor 46c and a rotation drive motor 46d for moving 44. The MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 outputs drive data corresponding to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d to the motor drive circuit 77 at a timing corresponding to each. The motor drive circuit 77 is individually electrically connected to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, and corresponds to the drive data received from the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71. , 45d, 46c, 46d are individually driven and controlled.

A harness connector 78 is provided so as to be present at an intermediate position of an electric path for outputting a signal from the motor drive circuit 77 to each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d. Further, the harness connector 78 is provided on the production control board 81, and an electrical path for outputting a signal from the light emission circuit 87 provided on the production control board 81 of the production control device 80 described later to the display light emitting section 53. It exists in the middle of the electric path for outputting a signal from the generated sound output circuit 88 to the speaker unit 54. As described above, the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d are mounted on the game board 21, and the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 are mounted on the front door frame 14. The signal lines for outputting signals to the respective drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 are all relayed by a relay board provided on the game board 21. In this case, one end of each of these signal lines is integrated in one connector member and the other end is provided as a harness in which one connector member is integrated. One end of the harness is electrically connected to the harness connector 78 of the output integrated substrate 72 in a detachable state, and the other end of the harness is detachable from the harness connector provided on the relay substrate. It is electrically connected in a normal state.

As will be described later in detail, the effect control device 80 controls the light emission of the display light emitting section 53 and the sound output of the speaker section 54. In this case, a signal line for outputting a signal to the display light emitting unit 53 and a signal line for outputting a signal to the speaker unit 54 are signal lines for outputting a signal to the respective drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d. Since the output integrated board 72 is integrated with the output integrated board 72, it is necessary to remove the electrical connection between the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the control device side for maintenance. In this case, the work areas are integrated in the output integration board 72, and the workability thereof can be improved.

Further, the signal lines for outputting signals to the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 are integrated into one harness and provided at one end of the harness. The connector member is connected to the harness connector 78 of the output integrated board 72. In this case, by removing the harness from the harness connector 78, the electrical connection between the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the control device side can be collectively released. This also makes it possible to improve workability in maintenance and the like.

The electrical path for outputting a signal from the light emitting circuit 87 to the display light emitting section 53 and the electrical path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker section 54 are the electrical paths formed on the distribution control board 71. Although it is connected to the harness connector 78 through an electric circuit formed on the circuit/output integrated board 72, the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 is not interposed in these electric paths. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the distribution control device 70 is interposed in the electric path for outputting a signal to the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, the light emitting circuit 87 and the sound output circuit are provided to the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. It is possible to prevent the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 from intervening in the processing for outputting a signal from 88. The distribution control board 71 is formed with an electric path for outputting a signal from the light emitting circuit 87 to the display light emitting section 53 and an electric path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker section 54. It is also possible that the electric circuit is not included.

As described above, the distribution control device 70 is provided with not only the distribution control board 71 but also the output integration board 72. The distribution control board 71 and the output integration board 72 are the distribution side connector 76a and the output integration side connector. It is electrically connected in a detachable state using 76b. The output integrated board 72 is provided with a motor drive circuit 77 and a harness connector 78. As a result, when it becomes necessary to change the presence or absence of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d and the increase or decrease in the number of the drive motors, the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit. When it becomes necessary to make the electrical connection mode for 54 different among the models, it is only necessary to change the configuration of the output integration board 72 between the models, and the configurations of the distribution control board 71 and the performance control device 80. (Excluding the structure of programs and data) can be used as is between those models.

Here, the processing executed by the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 will be described. In the following description, for convenience of description, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 are referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, and the MPU 73, the ROM 74, and the RAM 75 of the distribution control board 71 are the distribution side. The MPU 73, the distribution-side ROM 74, and the distribution-side RAM 75 are called.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed by the distribution-side MPU 73 in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

First, in step S301, a table setting process for setting a control table used for executing drive control of each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d and control of the effect control device 80 is executed. In the table setting process, for example, a control pattern table is set for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62. In a succeeding step S302, the contents of the display control of the respective display devices 41, 43, 44, the contents of the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53, and the contents of the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are provided to the effect control device 80. A command selection process for instructing the CPU 82 is executed. In the command selection process, a command is output to the effect CPU 82 according to the control table read in the table setting process of step S301.

Then, in step S303, a movable object control process for controlling the drive of each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d is executed. In the movable object control process, drive control of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d is executed according to the control table read in the table setting process in step S301. Then, in step S304, pointer update processing is executed. In the pointer update processing, the pointer information in the current control table is updated to the next pointer information.

<Table setting process>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the table setting process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 62 (step S401: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information contained in the type command, the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery and distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 62 at the start of the current game is specified, and the identification is performed. The written information is written in the RAM 64.

Thereafter, the advance notice lottery process is executed on condition that the change display time corresponding to the change command received this time from the main MPU 62 is the change display time corresponding to the situation in which the notice effect can be generated (step S403: YES). (Step S404). In the advance notice lottery processing, it is decided by lottery whether or not to give advance notice effect on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 in the current game time. As the notice effect, as already described, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the variable display of the symbols is started on the main display device 41, or a part of the symbols is variably displayed. In a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns, which is a symbol column, the character is displayed on any of the display devices 41, 43 and 44 separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Those including the ones, the background screen having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes are also included. The advance notice effect may occur in both game times when the reach effect is performed and when the reach effect is not performed, but the case where the reach effect is performed is higher than the case where the reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability. In addition, the notice effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the out-of-range results, and the notice times with a lower appearance rate in the game times corresponding to the jackpot results. Is set so as to easily occur.

In the advance notice lottery processing, the advance notice lottery table stored in advance in the distribution-side ROM 74 is read into the distribution-side RAM 75. The advance notice lottery table is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the variation command and the type command. Then, the value is acquired from the advance notice lottery counter provided to be regularly updated in the distribution side RAM 75, and the advance notice lottery result information corresponding to the acquired value is read from the advance notice lottery table read out this time. Identify.

When a negative determination is made in step S403 or when the processing of step S404 is executed, the variable display time corresponding to the variation command received this time from the main MPU 62 is the variable display time corresponding to the occurrence of the reach effect. (Step S405: YES), the reach effect lottery process is executed (step S406). That is, when the variation display time of the game times determined by the main MPU 62 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect to be executed is determined by the reach effect lottery process, and the main MPU 62 is determined. If the variation display time of the game times determined in No corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect, the reach effect lottery process is not executed.

In the reach effect, as already described, by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol columns displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41, the high frequency winning mode is dealt with. It includes a display state in which a reach symbol combination in which a jackpot symbol combination may be established is displayed, and in which state a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns. Further, in the state where the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns, and the background image and predetermined characters etc. are displayed as a moving image on the sub display devices 43 and 44. By performing the reach effect or reducing the display of the combination of the reach symbols by the display, or by hiding the display, the predetermined display is provided on substantially the entire display surface of the main display device 41 and the display surfaces of the sub display devices 43 and 44. It includes the one that performs the reach effect by displaying the characters and the like as a moving image. The reach effect is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the out-of-range results, and the reach effect with the lower appearance rate is given to the game times corresponding to the jackpot results. It is set to easily occur.

In the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table stored in advance in the distribution-side ROM 74 is read to the distribution-side RAM 75. The reach lottery table is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the variation command and the type command. Then, the value is obtained from the reach lottery counter provided to be regularly updated in the distribution side RAM 75, and the reach lottery result table corresponding to the obtained value is read out this time. Specify from.

When a negative determination is made in step S405, or when the process of step S406 is executed, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S407). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game time is either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the same odd symbol combination is selected for the 15R certainty variation jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination can be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R certainty variation jackpot result. The effective lines L1 to L5 on which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game time is the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result, it is the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and one effective line L1. The information corresponding to the stop result in which a specific symbol combination (“3.4.1”) is established on L5 is determined as the current stop result information. In this case, the activated lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game is a deviation result, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the content of the combination of the variation command and the type command. When the reach effect is generated, the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above specific symbols are not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5, and the stop result is one or two activated lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result for which the reach symbol combination is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when the reach effect does not occur, the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the above specific symbols are not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5, and the reach result is reached on all the activated lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is not established is determined as the information of the current stop result.

Then, the control pattern table setting process is executed (step S408). In the setting process of the control pattern table, the result of the advance notice lottery process (step S404), the presence or absence of the reach effect, the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S406) when the reach effect occurs, and the stop symbol determination process ( The control pattern table corresponding to the combination of the results of step S407) is read from the distribution-side ROM 74 and stored in the distribution-side RAM 75.

After that, the variable display time determination process is executed (step S409). In the processing, the information of the fluctuation display time of the current game time is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time from the main MPU 62, and the information of the specified fluctuation display time is provided in the distribution side RAM 75. Set to the variable time counter. The fluctuation time counter is a counter for specifying the timing at the distribution side MPU 73 at which the fluctuation display of the symbol on the main display device 41 in the current game time is ended and the fixed display of the symbol is started. The value set in the fluctuation time counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started by the distribution-side MPU 73, that is, every time 4 msec elapses.

In the situation where the effect execution control is performed according to the control pattern table set in step S408 (step S410: YES), the value of the fluctuation time counter of the distribution side RAM 75 set in step S409 is When it is "0" (step S411: YES), information of the fixed display time (specifically 0.5 sec) is set in the fixed time counter provided in the distribution side RAM 75 (step S412). The value set in the fixed time counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started by the distribution-side MPU 73, that is, every time 4 msec elapses. After that, the confirmation display start command is transmitted to the effect CPU 82 (step S413). As a result, in the effect CPU 82, each of the symbols that are on standby display on the main display device 41 is fixedly displayed as it is, and the state of the fixed display is continued for the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec). The main display device 41 is display-controlled so as to be maintained.

In the table setting process, in addition to the processes described above, other processes are executed in step S414. In other processing, for example, when the opening command is received from the main MPU 62, the control pattern table for executing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is read, and the ending command is received from the main MPU 62. Executes a process for ending the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, in a situation where neither the game turning effect nor the opening/closing execution mode effect is executed, the control pattern table for executing the demo display effect is read.

<Production control device 80>
Next, the effect control device 80 will be described. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the effect control device 80.

The effect control device 80 is provided with the effect CPU 82, the memory module 83, the work memory 84, the effect LSI 85, the VRAM 86, and the light emission circuit 87 and the sound output circuit 88 which have already been described. A substrate 81 is provided.

The effect CPU 82 has a function as a main control unit in the effect control device 80, and reads out, interprets, and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the effect CPU 82 is electrically connected to the distribution-side MPU 73, and various commands transmitted from the distribution-side MPU 73 are input to the effect CPU 82. The effect CPU 82 is electrically connected to the memory module 83 and the work memory 84 via the external bus 89, and based on the command received from the distribution side MPU 73, the programs and various data stored in the memory module 83. Is transmitted to the work memory 84. Further, the effect CPU 82 is electrically connected to the effect LSI 85 via the external bus 89, and outputs an image signal to each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 based on the command received from the distribution side MPU 73. A drawing instruction to cause the light emitting circuit 87 to emit light emitting drive data, and a sound output circuit 88 to output sound outputting drive data. It should be noted that the main display device 41 displays a two-dimensional image (2D image) or a three-dimensional image (3D image) and also displays an image in which these two-dimensional image and three-dimensional image are integrated. In addition, each sub-display device 43, 44 does not display a three-dimensional image but only a two-dimensional image.

The work memory 84 is a storage unit for temporarily storing the control data read from the memory module 83 and transferred, and also temporarily storing a flag and the like. The work memory 84 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The work memory 84 is faster than the memory module 83 in reading data. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 80 is satisfactorily executed. The work memory 84 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 83 to the work memory 84 based on a data transfer instruction from the rendering CPU 82 to the memory module 83. Specifically, all control data such as programs and data used in the effect CPU 82 are read to the work memory 84 when the supply of operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started. Then, the effect CPU 82 reads the control data transferred to the work memory 84 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The memory module 83 stores in advance control data including a control program and fixed value data, and also stores in advance various image data for displaying an image on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44. The memory module 83 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage. By the way, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 80 is executed well. Further, the memory module 83 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The various image data stored in the memory module 83 includes image data for 2D images such as sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on each display device 41, 43, 44, background data, and moving image data. include. The various image data stored in the memory module 83 includes object data such as characters displayed on the main display device 41, and image data for 3D images such as texture data attached to the object data. Has been.

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outer shape or pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referenced when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is. Further, the background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state where the still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described in detail later.

Further, the object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of three-dimensional coordinate vertices. In order to apply, for example, a surface model to the object data, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates preset for each object data as the origin. That is, in each object data, the relative position (that is, direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in the self-contained local coordinate system.

Texture data is image data attached to each polygon of object data. By attaching texture data to object data, an image corresponding to the object data, for example, a display image including a design or a character is generated. It Although the texture data may be held in any manner, it includes, for example, at least a combination of bitmap format data and color palette data that is referred to when determining a display color at each pixel of the bitmap image.

The memory module 83 uses, in addition to the control data and various image data used by the rendering CPU 82, light emission data for causing the display light emission unit 53 to emit light in a predetermined pattern and a predetermined amount from the speaker unit 54. Sound output data for performing sound output is stored in advance. The light emission data is data in a state in which luminance data corresponding to a time-series lighting pattern is compressed by a predetermined compression technique, and is read from the memory module 83 when light emission control is executed in the production LSI 85. A decoding process is executed on the light emission data, and the data developed by the decoding process is used. The sound output data is data in a state in which sound data corresponding to a time-series sound output pattern is compressed by a predetermined compression technique, and is read from the memory module 83 when the sound output control is executed in the production LSI 85. A decoding process is executed on the outputted sound output data, and the data developed by the decoding process is used.

The VRAM 86 outputs various data required for causing the display light emitting unit 53 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, various data required for outputting sound from the speaker unit 54, and an image output to each of the display devices 41, 43, 44. This is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for that purpose. The VRAM 86 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM, or dual port RAM may be used. The VRAM 86 is faster than the memory module 83 in reading data. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 80 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the VRAM 86 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Based on the rendering instruction from the rendering CPU 82, the rendering LSI 85 has a function of performing rendering on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 using the image data read in the VRAM 86, and based on a light emission instruction from the rendering CPU 82. , Read into the production LSI 85 on the basis of the function of controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 53 using the data read in the production LSI 85 and expanded by the decoding process, and the sound output instruction from the production CPU 82. It has a function of controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 54 by using the data that is output and expanded by the decoding process.

Specifically, the production LSI 85 has an I/F 91, a transfer controller 92, a register 93, a pre-transfer control unit 94, a moving picture decoder 95, a 2D control unit 96, a 3D control unit 97, and a first display. A circuit 98, a second display circuit 99, a light emission decoder 101, a light emission control unit 102, a sound decoder 103, and a sound output control unit 104 are provided. These respective circuits 91 to 104 are connected to each other via an internal bus 105, and the internal bus 105 is connected to an external bus 89 via an I/F 91.

The transfer controller 92 executes data transfer based on a transfer instruction from the pre-transfer controller 94, the 2D controller 96, the 3D controller 97, the light emission controller 102, and the sound output controller 104. Specifically, the data transfer from the memory module 83 to the register 93 of the production LSI 85 and the data transfer from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 are executed. In addition, data is read from the VRAM 86. Note that the register 93 is faster than the memory module 83 in reading data.

The pre-transfer control unit 94 requires image data when the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 create drawing data for one frame based on the drawing list transmitted from the rendering CPU 82 and stored in the register 93. However, the transfer instruction is issued to the transfer controller 92 so that it is read by the VRAM 86 by the time the drawing process is executed. As a result, the image data necessary for executing the drawing in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 is in a state of being read in advance in the VRAM 86.

The moving picture decoder 95 executes a decoding process of the moving image data transferred to the VRAM 86. Although details will be described later, a plurality of decoded image data (2D still image data) is created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data, and the plurality of decoded image data are expanded in the register 93. .. The decoded image data expanded in the register 93 is used when the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute drawing processing.

The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute processing by the control program according to the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 and stored in the register 93. Note that the control programs for operating the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 may all be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which a control program is stored in advance is built in the production LSI 85 and the control program concerned is stored. The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 may execute a predetermined process according to the contents of the drawing list. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 83.

When the drawing process is executed in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, one frame of drawing data is created in the VRAM 86 using (or by processing) the image data read in the VRAM 86. The drawing data for one frame is data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface of each display device 41, 43, 44 is updated at a predetermined update timing. I mean. As will be described later in detail, the VRAM 86 is provided with two frame areas for each of the main display device 41 and the sub display devices 43 and 44 as an area for creating drawing data for one frame. Each frame area is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame in the corresponding display device 41, 43, 44. Specifically, each frame area includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and it is possible to set 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes. The storage capacity is not limited to the full-color method, and for example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Incidentally, the 3D control unit 97 has a geometry calculation unit and a rendering unit. The geometry calculation unit arranges the object data designated as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system based on the drawing list stored in the register 93. Further, the geometry calculation unit executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object data in the world coordinate system. Then, finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface. Based on the drawing list stored in the register 93, the rendering unit projects each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and pastes texture data to generate two-dimensional data. Create drawing data for one frame.

Since the two frame regions are provided for each of the main display device 41 and the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the drawing data created in one frame region of the main display device 41 is used, for example. In the situation where drawing on the main display device 41 is being executed, drawing data to be used later is created in the other frame area of the main display device 41. That is, the double buffer method is used as the frame area.

The first display circuit 98 outputs an image signal corresponding to each dot of the main display device 41 based on the drawing data created in one frame region to be output of the two frame regions corresponding to the main display device 41. Is generated and the image signal is output to the main display device 41. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the frame area to be output to the first display circuit 98. The transferred drawing data is subjected to resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the main display device 41, and converted into gradation data. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the main display device 41 is generated and output.

The second display circuit 99 outputs each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 based on the drawing data created in one frame region to be output of the two frame regions corresponding to the sub display devices 43 and 44. An image signal corresponding to the dot is generated and the image signal is output to each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the frame area to be output to the second display circuit 99. The transferred image data is adjusted in resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and is converted into grayscale data. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is generated and output based on the gradation data.

Based on the light emission instruction from the effect CPU 82, the light emission decoder 101 waits until the light emission data necessary for executing the light emission control at the predetermined timing in the light emission control unit 102 becomes the timing for executing the light emission control. Then, a transfer instruction is issued to the transfer controller 92 so that it is read by the VRAM 86. Further, the light emission decoder 101 reads the light emission data previously transferred to the VRAM 86 and performs decoding processing on the light emission data to create developed brightness data, and the created expanded brightness data. Are stored in the register 93. As a result, the luminance data after the development of the light emission data is stored in the register 93 until the predetermined timing.

The light emission control unit 102 outputs the luminance data loaded in the register 93 to the light emission circuit 87 based on the light emission instruction from the effect CPU 82. As a result, a signal according to the brightness data is output from the light emitting circuit 87, and the display light emitting unit 53 is in the light emitting state in a mode according to the brightness data.

The sound decoder 103 executes the sound output control by the sound output data required when the sound output control unit 104 executes the sound output control at a predetermined timing based on the sound output instruction from the effect CPU 82. By the timing, the transfer instruction is given to the transfer controller 92 so that the VRAM 86 reads it. Further, the sound decoder 103 reads the sound output data pre-transferred to the VRAM 86 and performs decoding processing on the sound output data to create expanded sound data, and the created expanded sound data. Are stored in the register 93. As a result, the sound data after the development of the sound output data is stored in the register 93 by the time the predetermined timing is reached.

The sound output control unit 104 outputs the sound data expanded in the register 93 to the sound output circuit 88 based on the sound output instruction from the effect CPU 82. As a result, a signal according to the sound data is output from the sound output circuit 88, and a sound is output from the speaker unit 54 in a manner according to the sound data.

<Processing configuration of production CPU 82>
Next, a process executed by the effect CPU 82 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a V interrupt process which is repeatedly activated by the effect CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle, specifically in a cycle of 20 msec.

When outputting the image signal for one frame to the main display device 41, the first display circuit 98 starts the output of the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the display surface, and the horizontal signal including the dot at one end. The image signal is sequentially output to the dots arranged on the line, and the image signal is sequentially output to the dots from the left to the right for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display surface. When outputting the image signal for one frame to the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the second display circuit 99 starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner portion of each display surface, and temporarily outputs the dot. The image signal is sequentially output to the dots lined up on the horizontal line included in the above, and the image signal is sequentially output to the dots from left to right for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display surface. In this case, the production LSI 85 outputs a V interrupt signal to the production CPU 82 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot in all of the display devices 41, 43, 44, and updates the image of one frame. CPU 82 for production is made to recognize that it is completed. The output cycle of the V interrupt signal is 20 msec, which is the same as the update cycle of the image for one frame. In this respect, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started.

In the V interrupt processing, first, command analysis processing is executed (step S501). Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer provided in the work memory 84 is analyzed. Here, when the production CPU 82 receives the strobe signal from the distribution-side MPU 73, it executes the command interrupt processing regardless of the processing being executed at that time. In the command interruption process, the command received from the distribution-side MPU 73 is transferred to the command buffer of the work memory 84.

After that, on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving the new command (step S502: YES), the command corresponding process is executed (step S503). In the command handling process, the execution target table for executing the program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 83. As the execution target table, a table for executing display control of each display device 41, 43, 44, a table for executing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53, and a sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed. And a table for it exists. When displaying a moving image corresponding to the received command on the display surface of each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, the execution target table for display control displays one frame of image at each image update timing. The contents of processing required for are specified. The execution target table for light emission control defines the content of processing required to cause light emission at each light emission control timing when causing the display light emitting unit 53 to perform light emission according to the light emission pattern corresponding to the received command. ing. The sound output control execution target table is necessary for causing the speaker unit 54 to output the sound according to the sound output pattern corresponding to the received command, in order to output the sound at each sound output control timing. The contents of processing are defined.

The commands received by the production CPU 82 from the distribution-side MPU 73 include a command at the start of fluctuation, a command at the start of notice production, a command at the start of normal reach, a command at the start of super reach, a confirmation display start command, a notification start command, and There is a notification release command. When these commands are received, the execution target table necessary for executing the effect or notification corresponding to each command on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 is read.

When a negative determination is made in step S502 or when the process of step S503 is executed, the task process for light emission control (step S504), the task process for sound output control (step S505), and the task process for display control (step Execute S506).

In the task processing for light emission control, by referring to the control data of the current processing times in the execution target table set as the usage target of light emission control, it is possible to realize the light emission mode corresponding to the current instruction timing. Various data necessary for issuing a light emission instruction to the dedicated LSI 85 is set. As the various data, specifically, when this time is the timing to instruct the execution of the decoding process of the light emission data, the address information of the area in which the light emission data is stored in the memory module 83, the There is address information of an area to which the light emission data is transferred, information for instructing the light emission decoder 101 to decode the light emission data, and the like. Further, when this time is the timing for instructing the change of the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 53, the various data is an area in which the data to be used is stored in the light emitting data developed in the register 93. There is information such as address.

In the task processing for sound output control, the sound output mode corresponding to the instruction timing of this time is realized by referring to the control data of this processing time in the execution target table set as the usage target of sound output control. Therefore, various data necessary for giving a sound output instruction to the production LSI 85 is set. As the various data, specifically, when this time is the timing to instruct the execution of the decoding process of the sound output data, the address information of the area in which the sound output data is stored in the memory module 83, the register 93. In the above, there is address information of an area to which the sound output data is transferred, information for instructing the sound decoder 103 to decode the sound output data, and the like. Further, when this time is the timing for instructing to change the sound output mode of the speaker unit 54, the data to be used among the sound output data expanded in the register 93 is stored in the various data. Area address information etc. exists.

In the task processing for display control, by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the execution target table set as the target of display control, one frame of image corresponding to the current instruction timing is displayed. Therefore, various data necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the production LSI 85 is set. As the various data, specifically, address information of an area where image data of a control target is stored in the memory module 83, information of a frame region of a target for which drawing data is to be created using the image data of the control target, and control There are coordinate information when writing the target image data, scale information when writing the image data, and uniform α value (translucent value) information when writing the image data.

After that, the list output process is executed (step S507). In the list output process, a light emission list for providing a light emission mode corresponding to the instruction timing of the current processing time, a sound output list for achieving a sound output mode corresponding to the instruction timing of the current processing time, and the current processing time Each of the drawing lists for displaying the image for one frame corresponding to the instruction timing is created, and the created various lists are transmitted to the production LSI 85. In this case, in the light emission list, the data for light emission grasped in the immediately preceding task processing for light emission control is set as the use target. The light emission decoder 101 of the production LSI 85 executes the decoding process of the light emission data according to the light emission list, and the light emission control unit 102 of the production LSI 85 outputs the light emission data to the light emission circuit 87 according to the light emission list. Further, in the sound output list, the sound output data grasped in the immediately preceding task processing for sound output control is set as a target for use. The sound decoder 103 of the production LSI 85 executes the decoding process of the sound output data according to the sound output list, and the sound output control unit 104 of the production LSI 85 outputs the sound to the sound output circuit 88 according to the sound output list. Output the data. Further, in the drawing list, the image data grasped in the task process for the immediately preceding display control is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the production LSI 85 create drawing data in the frame area of the VRAM 86 according to the drawing list. The processing in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 will be described in detail later.

The task processing for display control in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, a setting process for starting control is executed (step S601). In the setting process for control start, a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the effect CPU 82 at the current processing time based on the currently set execution target table for display control. To execute. The individual image is defined by one 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for design and image data for back surface, or a combination of image data for object and image data for texture. It is a 3D image.

Regarding the setting process for control start, first, based on the currently set execution target table for display control, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in this processing time. To do. If it exists, it searches the work memory 84 for a free buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and one-to-one with the individual image grasped as the control start target. Reserve a free buffer area to correspond. Further, the initialization processing is executed for all the secured empty buffer areas, and the parameter information for starting the control according to the individual image is set in the initialized empty buffer areas.

Then, the control update target is grasped (step S602). This control update target is an individual image for which the setting process for control start has been completed and which may be included in the image for one frame after the current processing time.

After that, the background arithmetic processing is executed (step S603). In the background calculation process, if the image is for the backmost surface that constitutes a background image, or if it is a 2D image of the background character, the coordinates on the virtual two-dimensional plane, the rotation angle, the scale, and the uniform α value. And various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as .alpha. data specification is derived. On the other hand, in the calculation processing for the background, if the image for the backmost that constitutes the background image or the image for 3D of the background characters is used, the coordinates in the world coordinate system, the rotation angle, the scale, and the brightness A process of calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as information of a light for attaching a mark, information of a camera for performing projection, and Z test designation is executed.

After that, the production calculation process is executed (step S604). In the effect calculation process, a process for calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is executed for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach effect, notice effect, and jackpot effect. In addition, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameters is executed for the individual image to be displayed when various notifications are made.

Then, the symbol calculation process is executed (step S605). In the symbol calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped from the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner in each game. Further, the various parameter information is derived with respect to the grasped control update target.

By the way, in each process of step S603 to step S605, a process of updating the control start parameter set in step S601 is executed. Further, in each processing of steps S603 to S605, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing is reached is used. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. Further, the animation data is stored in advance in the memory module 83, and is transferred to the work memory 84 in advance by the timing when it needs to be read by the effect CPU 82.

After that, the process of grasping the drawing instruction target is executed (step S606). In the process of recognizing the drawing instruction target, one frame of image corresponding to the drawing data creation instruction of this time is selected from among the individual images subject to the control update by the calculation processes of step S603, step S604, and step S605. A process of grasping the included individual image is executed. The grasping is performed by referring to the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale information of various individual images, and executing a predetermined calculation. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, the individual images specified in the drawing list are not all the individual images for which control has been started, but only the individual images to be displayed, so that the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 display the individual images. It is not necessary to select the individual images of, and even if the individual images are not selected, it is not necessary to uselessly perform the drawing process on the individual images that are not the display target. As a result, the processing load on the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 can be reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the effect CPU 82 may be the same as the individual image to be controlled by the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. In that case, there is no need to execute the process of step S606.

The contents of displaying a 2D image and a 3D image using a drawing list created based on the result of the task processing for display control will be described.

When the image is displayed on the main display device 41, the background image is displayed so that the player recognizes that the image is displayed on the back side, and when a predetermined display effect occurs, the effect is displayed in front of the background image. A production image such as a game character is displayed, and in the case of a game diversion production, a design image is displayed so that the player recognizes that it is displayed in front of the background image and the production image. .. In this case, the background image and the effect image are displayed as a 3D image based on the execution of the drawing process by the 3D control unit 97, and the symbol image is displayed as a 2D image based on the execution of the drawing process by the 2D control unit 96. Therefore, as a drawing list for displaying an image on the main display device 41, a drawing instruction is given by the 3D drawing list for displaying a 3D image for the background image and the effect image, and a 2D image for the pattern image is displayed. Drawing instructions are given by the 2D drawing list for display. As a display of an image on the main display device 41, a realistic image can be displayed by displaying a 3D image for a background image and an effect image, and a processing load can be reduced by displaying a 2D image for a design image. Is possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a 3D image may be displayed for the background image and a 2D image may be displayed for the effect image and the pattern image, and a 3D image may be displayed for the background image and the pattern image. A 2D image may be displayed for the effect image, a 2D image may be displayed for the background image and the effect image, and a 3D image may be displayed for the design image.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the register 93 used when the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute the drawing process. As shown in FIG. 16, the register 93 is provided with a drawing area 111 for main display as an area used for displaying an image on the main display device 41. In the main display drawing area 111, a 2D drawing area 112 in which drawing data for displaying a pattern image as a 2D image on the main display apparatus 41 is created, and as a 3D image on the main display apparatus 41, a background image and an effect image. 3D drawing area 113 in which drawing data for displaying is created. Further, in the drawing region 111 for main display, a first main frame region 114 and a second main frame region 115 are provided. In each of the main first frame area 114 and the main second frame area 115, the main display device is synthesized by combining the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 and the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 113. One frame of drawing data to be displayed on 41 is created. In this case, in the situation where drawing on the main display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one of the main first frame area 114 and the main second frame area 115, the other Drawing data to be used in the future is created for the frame area.

On the other hand, when an image is displayed on the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, a background image is displayed so that the player recognizes that the image is displayed on the back side, and a predetermined display effect is provided. When it occurs, an effect image such as an effect character is displayed in front of the background image. In this case, these background image and effect image are displayed as 2D images. That is, although the 2D image is displayed on the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, the 3D image is not displayed. Therefore, with respect to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, the drawing instruction by the 3D drawing list is not issued, and the drawing instruction by the 2D drawing list is issued. In displaying images on the sub display devices 43 and 44, only the 2D image is used without using the 3D image, so that not only the main display device 41 but also the sub display devices 43 and 44 are provided. In the configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load for displaying an image on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44.

As shown in FIG. 16, the register 93 is provided with a drawing area 116 for sub display as an area used for displaying an image on the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. The sub-display drawing area 116 is provided with a sub-first frame area 117 and a sub-second frame area 118. Drawing data for displaying a background image and an effect image as a 2D image on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is created by the 2D control unit 96 in each of the sub first frame region 117 and the sub second frame region 118. To be done. Further, as will be described in detail later, in each of the sub first frame area 117 and the sub second frame area 118, drawing data for displaying an image of one frame on the first sub display device 43 and a second Drawing data for the sum of the drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the sub display device 44 is created. In this case, drawing on the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is performed by using the drawing data created in one of the sub first frame region 117 and the sub second frame region 118. Drawing data that will be used in the future is created for the other frame area in the situation where it is being executed.

As described above, both the 2D image and the 3D image can be simultaneously displayed as the image for one frame on the main display device 41, and the 2D image is displayed as the image for one frame on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. At each image update timing for one frame, the image for one frame is updated in each of the main display device 41 and each of the sub display devices 43, 44, and the image for each frame at the image update timing is updated. A combination of at least one 2D drawing list and at least one 3D drawing list for updating is provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85. That is, by completing the drawing process by the 2D control unit 96 for at least one 2D drawing list and the drawing process by the 3D control unit 97 for at least one 3D drawing list, each display device 41, 43, 44. The creation of the drawing data of the image for one frame is completed.

Next, a 2D drawing list for displaying a 2D image will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 17A to 17C.

Header information is set in the 2D drawing list. In the header information, information of the target buffer, which is information indicating in which frame area 114, 115, 117, 118 drawing data for displaying an image corresponding to the 2D drawing list is set. There is. Specifically, information indicating which of the main first frame area 114 and the main second frame area 115 drawing data for displaying an image on the main display device 41 is set. Information indicating which of the sub-first frame area 117 and the sub-second frame area 118 the drawing data for displaying an image on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is set. Further, various designation information is set in the header information.

In the 2D drawing list, in addition to the above header information, as information corresponding to a plurality of types of image data used for displaying an image of one frame, frame areas 114, 115, 117, 118 of each image data are provided. The information of the display order priority data indicating the drawing order of the image data, the parameter information of each image data, and the address information corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored are set. More specifically, the display order priority data information is set to be serial number numerical information, and a combination of parameter information and address information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. ..

The display order priority data is set such that an individual image to be displayed is located in the back side of the display surface in an image for one frame and is a drawing target first. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data. In the 2D drawing list of FIG. 17A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written in the drawing target frame area, then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and the sprite data B is further written.

Plural kinds of parameters are set in the parameter information P(0), P(1), P(2),.... Specifically, the parameter P(0) of the background data indicates the position on the virtual two-dimensional plane (frame regions 114, 115, 117, 118) when writing the background data, as shown in FIG. 17(b). The coordinate information, the rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the virtual two-dimensional plane when the background data is written, and the magnification when writing to the frame area with respect to the size set as the initial state of the background data The information of the scale shown, the information of the uniform α value indicating the entire transparent information (or the transparent information) when writing the background data, and the information of the α data designation indicating whether or not the α data is applied and the application target are set. There is. The types of the above parameters are the same for the sprite data A as shown in FIG.

The coordinate information is not set individually for all the pixels forming the image data, but the coordinate information is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as the reference pixel for which the coordinate information is designated. The 2D control unit 96 can recognize that the information of the designated coordinate is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when the image data is arranged, the one pixel at the center is on the designated coordinate. To do so. As a result, it is possible to suppress the information capacity (that is, the data amount) of the coordinate information to be designated for one image data in the effect CPU 82. Further, since it is not necessary for the rendering LSI 85 to recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to the central one pixel, and may be a pixel having a corner angle such as an upper left corner or an upper right corner. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as rectangular shapes, by using the corner pixels as the reference pixels, the production LSI 85 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

Further, the uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the effect CPU 82. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in the memory module 83 in advance as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

Information corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored is set in the address information A(0), A(1), A(2),.... Here, when each image data is used in the production LSI 85, the image data is not directly read from the memory module 83 and used, but is provided from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 by the time when the use start timing of the image data is reached. The pre-transfer area 86a (see FIG. 13) is read and the image data is read from the pre-transfer area 86a and used. In this case, in the 2D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, the decoded image data created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data is excluded from the memory module 83 as address information. Information of the address ID corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored is set. Then, when the image data is transferred from the area of the address of the memory module 83 corresponding to the information of the address ID to the advance transfer area 86a in the advance transfer control section 94 of the production LSI 85, the image data is transferred in the advance transfer area 86a. The information corresponding to the address of the area to which the image data is transferred is overwritten on the address information corresponding to the image data that is the current read target in the 2D drawing list.

On the other hand, since the decoded image data is written in the moving image expansion area 119 (see FIG. 16) provided in the register 93, it is not necessary to read it from the memory module 83. Therefore, when the decoded image data is set in the 2D drawing list, the address information corresponding to the decoded image data indicates that the decoded image data to be used this time is stored in the moving image expansion area 119. The address is set. Since the decoded image data is treated by the pre-transfer control unit 94 as not to be transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer control unit 94 does not rewrite the address information corresponding to the decoded image data in the drawing list. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is initially blank, and the address information in the pre-transfer area 94 and the decoded image data in the expansion area 119 for the moving image. The information for specifying the address of the area in which is stored may be set.

The 2D drawing list in which the address information has been rewritten is the target of the drawing processing in the 2D control unit 96, but the 2D control unit 96 sets the information set as the address information in the 2D drawing list during the drawing processing. The image data is read from the pre-transfer area 86a corresponding to or the moving image expansion area 119. By the way, moving image data may be set as image data to be used in the 2D drawing list. However, when moving image data is set, the moving image data is first read from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a. The moving image data read out to the advance transfer area 86a is decoded by the moving image decoder 95 of the production LSI 85. Then, the plurality of pieces of decoded image data obtained by the decoding process are stored in the moving image development area 119 as already described. However, the moving image data itself is excluded from the execution target of the drawing process by the 2D control unit 96.

In this way, in the 2D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, the address ID information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored in the memory module 83 is set as the address information. On the other hand, the address information for specifying the transfer destination area of the image data from the memory module 83 is not set. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the 2D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82. Further, since the effect CPU 82 does not need to set the address information for specifying the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data is transferred in the 2D drawing list, the effect for creating the 2D drawing list It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 82.

Further, when the transfer of the image data from the memory module 83 in the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the production LSI 85 to the pre-transfer area 86a is completed, the address information of the 2D drawing list indicates the image data to be transferred in the memory module 83. The information of the address ID corresponding to the address of the area where is stored is rewritten to the information corresponding to the address of the area where the image data to be transferred is transferred in the pre-transfer area 86a. Accordingly, even if the information corresponding to the address of the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data is transferred is not initially set in the 2D drawing list, when the 2D control unit 96 executes the drawing process, The information corresponding to the address of the area of the transfer area 86a is set in the 2D drawing list.

Next, a 3D drawing list for displaying a 3D image will be described with reference to the explanatory views of FIGS. 18A and 18B.

Similar to the 2D drawing list, header information is set in the 3D drawing list. The content of the header information is the same as in the case of the 2D drawing list. In the 3D drawing list, in addition to the header information described above, as information corresponding to a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system when the drawing data is created this time, the information of each image data in the world coordinate system is set. Information of display order priority data indicating an arrangement order, parameter information of each image data, and address information corresponding to an address of an area in which each image data is stored are set. More specifically, the display order priority data information is set to be serial number numerical information, and a combination of parameter information and address information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. ..

In the 3D drawing list of FIG. 18A, the back image data is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. Has been done. Further, the image data for effect is set as the order after the image data for background, for example, the effect object A is set as the m-th, the effect object B is set as the m+1-th, and so on. There is.

Plural kinds of parameter information are set in the parameter information P′(0), P′(1), P′(2),..., P′(m), P′(m+1),. ing. Regarding the parameter information P′(0) of the image data for the back side, specifically, as shown in FIG. 18B, information of coordinates indicating the position in the world coordinate system when the image data for the back side is set. (X-value information, Y-value information, Z-value information), rotation angle information indicating a rotation angle in the world coordinate system when setting back-side image data, and back-side image data initial For the scale set as the state, the uniform α indicating the scale information indicating the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system and the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when setting the image data for the back surface. Value information and are set.

Here, the coordinate information is set individually for all the vertices of the object data. The information on the coordinates is set for the object data but not for the texture data. In the texture data, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 83 in a state of being attached to a combination of object data and texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the 3D control unit 97 of the production LSI 85 when performing texture mapping.

The parameter information P′(0) includes camera information including coordinate and orientation information of the virtual camera when the back image data is projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, and the back image data. Light information including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shade when rendering is set.

In the parameter information P′(0), Z test designation information indicating whether or not the Z buffer method, which is a kind of hidden surface erasing method, is applied is set. The Z-buffer method is each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) arranged on the Z-axis when many objects and two-dimensional images are overlapped in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system. Is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to, and the numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit area in the frame area.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, the Z-sort method is set as a method for performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which, for each pixel arranged on the Z axis, the numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in the corresponding unit area in the frame region. When the Z sorting method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In this state, the addition processing of these numerical information and the calculation processing for fusion are executed. Although description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sort is omitted, it is activated when an effect image is displayed.

In the parameter information P′(0), α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target, and fog designation information indicating whether fog is applied and an application target are set. Here, the α value is the transparency information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying the α data. The uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the effect CPU 82. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data and texture data, and is stored in the memory module 83 in advance as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction in the world coordinate system, specifically, the Z-axis direction. Fog is used to represent fog and the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, fog is applied to the image for one frame in a fixed manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if a fog similar to the other objects is applied to the object arranged on the back side in the Z-axis direction, and the texture does not appear because it is too dark, another fog is set for the object. It is good to have a configuration. Accordingly, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while preventing the above texture from being impaired.

Like the 2D drawing list, the address information A′(0), A′(1), A′(2),... Contains information corresponding to the address of the area in which each image data is stored. It is set. In this case, in the 3D drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, the address ID information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored in the memory module 83 is set as the address information. And the address of the area to which the image data is transferred in the pre-transfer area 86a when the transfer of the image data to the pre-transfer area 86a in the VRAM 86 is completed in the pre-transfer control section 94 of the production LSI 85. The point where the address information is rewritten in the information, and when the decoded image data is set in the 3D drawing list, the address information includes the address of the area where the decoded image data is stored in the moving image expansion area 119. Similar to the 2D drawing list, the information corresponding to is set from the beginning and the rewriting process by the advance transfer control unit 94 for the address information is not executed. However, since the image data of the object and the image data of the texture are required to display one type of individual image in the 3D image, the image data of the object and the image data of the texture are set as one drawing target. At the same time, address information is set for each of the image data of the object and the image data of the texture.

Next, the 2D drawing processing executed by the 2D control unit 96 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the 2D drawing processing executed by the 2D control unit 96. The 2D control unit 96 uses the program and data stored in advance in the memory module 83 to execute the 2D drawing process. All of these programs and data are read into a register provided inside the 2D control unit 96 when the supply of operating power to the production LSI 85 is started. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the 2D control unit 96 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use the programs and data stored in advance in the memory module 83.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the 2D creation completion flag provided in the register 93 of the production LSI 85 is "0" and there is a 2D drawing list for which the drawing process has not been executed yet in the register 93. (Step S701). The 2D creation completion flag is a state in which the drawing process for the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, and the drawing created in the 2D drawing region 112 in the drawing region 111 for main display by the drawing process. This is a flag for the 2D control unit 96 to specify that the data is not in the state of being drawn in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 in order to create drawing data for one frame. .. When the drawing process for the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, "1" is set to the 2D creation completion flag, and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 by the drawing process is one frame. The 2D creation completion flag is cleared to “0” when the drawing is performed in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 to create minute drawing data. In addition, the case where there is an incomplete 2D drawing list, the case where there is a 2D drawing list for which the drawing processing for all image data has not been completed, and the 2D which is not the execution target of the drawing processing yet This is applicable when the drawing list for use exists.

If the value of the 2D creation completion flag is “0” and there is an incomplete 2D drawing list, update processing of the drawing target is executed (step S702). In the update processing of the drawing target, when one drawing list for 2D is newly set as the execution target of the drawing processing this time, the image data set first in the display order priority data in the drawing list for 2D is drawn this time. Select it as the execution target of the process. On the other hand, when this time is in the process of creating one 2D drawing list, the image data set to the next display order priority data with respect to the display order priority data of the image data that was the target of the previous drawing process. Is selected as the execution target of this drawing process.

Then, for the moving image in which the address of the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data to be executed this time is transferred or the decoded image data to be executed in this time is expanded. The address of the area of the expansion area 119 is grasped from the address information in the 2D drawing list (step S703). In this case, when the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the advance transfer area 86a, the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read the image data from the address of the advance transfer area 86a. On the other hand, when the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the moving image development area 119, the image data is read from the address of the moving image development area 119.

In addition, the parameter to be applied to the image data that is the target of the drawing process this time is grasped by executing the calculation using the parameter information in the 2D drawing list (step S704). After that, a writing process is executed to draw the image data, which is the target of the drawing process this time, in the area to be the drawing target while applying the parameters grasped in step S704 (step S705). In this writing process, if drawing data for displaying an image on the main display device 41 is created, the writing process is executed in the 2D drawing area 112 of the register 93 to display the image on the sub display devices 43 and 44. In the case of creating drawing data for writing, the writing process is executed in the frame area on the side of the current drawing data creation target of the first sub-frame area 117 and the second sub-frame area 118 of the register 93. ..

Then, it is determined whether or not the execution of the processes of steps S702 to S705 has been completed for all the image data specified in the one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame ( Step S706). If the number of 2D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame is one, the last order of the image data of the plurality of types of image data that is the drawing instruction target in the 2D drawing list Creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data. Further, when the number of 2D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame is two, the order in which the drawing process is executed is a plurality of types that are drawing instruction targets in the rear 2D drawing list. The creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last-order image data of the image data. In step S706, it is determined whether or not the creation completion data is set in association with the current display order priority data. When the creation completion data is set (step S706: YES), the execution of the processes of steps S702 to S705 is completed for all the image data specified in the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame. This means that the 2D creation completion flag of the register 93 is set to "1" (step S707).

Next, the 3D drawing processing executed by the 3D control unit 97 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the 3D drawing processing executed by the 3D control unit 97. The 3D control unit 97 uses the program and data stored in advance in the memory module 83 to execute the 3D drawing process. All of these programs and data are read out to a register provided inside the 3D control unit 97 when the supply of operating power to the production LSI 85 is started. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the 3D control unit 97 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use the programs and data stored in advance in the memory module 83.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the 3D creation completion flag provided in the register 93 of the rendering LSI 85 is “0” and there is a 3D drawing list in which the drawing process has not been executed yet in the register 93. (Step S801). The 3D creation completion flag indicates that the drawing process for the 3D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, and the drawing created in the 3D drawing area 113 in the drawing area 111 for main display by the drawing process. This is a flag for the 3D control unit 97 to specify that the data is not drawn in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 in order to create drawing data for one frame. .. When the drawing process for the 3D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame is completed, "1" is set to the 3D creation completion flag, and the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 113 by the drawing process is one frame. When the drawing is performed in the main first frame area 114 or the main second frame area 115 to create minute drawing data, the 3D creation completion flag is cleared to "0". Further, the case where there is an uncompleted 3D drawing list, the case where there is a 3D drawing list for which the drawing processing for all image data has not been completed, and the 3D which is not the execution target of the drawing processing yet This is the case when the drawing list for use exists.

When the value of the 3D creation completion flag is “0” and there is an incomplete 3D drawing list, the processes of steps S802 to S810 are executed. In the processing of steps S802 to S810, first, it is determined whether or not the creation completion data is set in association with the last display order priority data in one 3D drawing list, and the creation completion data is set. If so, only the one 3D drawing list is set as the execution target of the processing of steps S802 to S810. On the other hand, when the creation completion data is not set, it is determined whether or not the creation completion data is set along with the last display order priority data in the 3D drawing list of the next order, and the creation completion data is determined. If is set, the two drawing lists for 3D up to that point are collectively set as the execution target of the processing of steps S802 to S810. Thereby, even when a plurality of 3D drawing lists are set as the 3D drawing list for displaying an image for one frame, it is possible to appropriately create the 3D drawing data. ..

In step S802, the address of the area of the pre-transfer area 86a in which the image data for the background designated as the drawing target in the 3D drawing list or the expansion area 119 for the moving image is determined from the address information in the 3D drawing list. Understand (step S802). In this case, when the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the advance transfer area 86a, the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read the image data from the address of the advance transfer area 86a. On the other hand, when the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the moving image development area 119, the image data is read from the address of the moving image development area 119. Then, the setting process for the background is executed (step S803).

In the background setting process, it is determined whether or not the background image data whose address information is grasped in step S802 is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, a free buffer area to be referred to for arrangement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. After that, world conversion for converting the coordinate value of the local coordinate system of the image data for the background into the coordinate value of the world coordinate system so that the coordinate, the rotation angle, and the scale specified in the parameter information in the 3D drawing list are obtained. The processing is executed to set it in the secured buffer area. If it is arranged, the parameters to be applied to the target background image data are grasped by executing the operation using the parameter information in the 3D drawing list, and the data is stored in the already secured buffer area. Execute the update process of various parameters that have been set. Further, in the background setting process, the control ending process is executed to erase the background image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

After that, the addresses of the areas of the pre-transfer area 86a in which the image data for rendering designated as the drawing target in the 3D drawing list and the expansion area 119 for the moving image are grasped from the address information in the 3D drawing list. (Step S804). In this case, when the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the advance transfer area 86a, the transfer controller 92 is instructed to read the image data from the address of the advance transfer area 86a. On the other hand, when the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the moving image development area 119, the image data is read from the address of the moving image development area 119. After that, the setting process for effect is executed (step S805).

In the setting process for effect, it is determined whether the image data for effect whose address information is grasped in step S804 is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If they are not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the background setting process. If they are arranged, various parameter update processing is executed as in the case described in the background setting processing. Further, in the setting process for effect, a control ending process is executed to delete the image data for effect which is not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

As a result of the processing in steps S802 to S805 being executed, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 21, the placement target is set by the 3D drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image designated as and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angles, and scales also designated by the 3D drawing list is completed. .. Note that FIG. 21 simply shows a state in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged.

After that, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S806). In the conversion processing to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and the direction of the viewpoint are determined based on the information of the camera specified by the 3D drawing list, and the world coordinate system and the viewpoint are set to the origin based on the coordinates and the direction of the viewpoint. To the camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 21, the viewpoint PC11 indicated by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding thereto is set.

Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and in reality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. .. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, viewpoint switching can be performed individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 21 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

After that, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S807). In the conversion processing into the visual field coordinate system, each of the camera coordinate systems described above is converted into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (visual field angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, if it is included in the visual field of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image near the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

After that, clipping processing is executed (step S808). In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S807 is grasped with the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, in this state, the individual images extracted in step S807 are set with reference to the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 21) corresponding to the frame areas 114 and 115 corresponding to the main display device 41 to be drawn. Clipping.

Then, the writing process is executed (step S809). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the 3D drawing list, and shadows, reflections, etc. are determined for each object extracted by the clipping process based on the virtual light source. Calculate

Then, in step S808, each individual image clipped and further subjected to the lighting process is projected (for example, perspective projection or parallel projection) on the screen area PC12 that is a virtual two-dimensional plane, and the data after the projection is projected. By executing the color information setting process, the 3D drawing data is created in the 3D drawing area 113 in the register 93 (step S810). In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information for each pixel (that is, each polygon) or each vertex for the projected data. In the color information setting process, basically, a texture mapping process of pasting texture data corresponding to each of the projected data is executed. Further, depending on the situation, processing such as bump mapping and transparency mapping is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, or if the process of step S810 is executed, "1" is set to the 3D creation completion flag of the register 93 (step S811). After that, by determining whether or not both the 2D creation completion flag and the 3D creation completion flag of the register 93 are set to "1", the 2D control unit for the 2D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame. It is determined whether or not the drawing processing by 96 and the drawing processing by the 3D control unit 97 for the 3D drawing list corresponding to the image display for one frame are completed (step S812). That is, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data of the image for one frame on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 has been completed.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S812, both the 2D creation completion flag and the 3D creation completion flag are cleared to "0" (step S813). Then, the drawing data composition process is executed (step S814). In the drawing data synthesizing process, the main frame area 114 and the main second frame area 115 of the register 93 are first created in the 3D drawing area 113 in the frame area for which the drawing data is created this time. Existing drawing data is written, and then the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 is written. In this case, since the completely transparent α value is set in the area where the image data is not set in the 2D drawing area 112, with respect to the drawing data written from the 3D drawing area 113 in the frame area of the creation target, Only the drawing data of the portion corresponding to the design image in the 2D drawing area 112 will be additionally drawn. When drawing the drawing data of the portion corresponding to this pattern image, the area for which the opaque α value is set is overwritten, and the area for which the semitransparent α value is set is the semitransparent area. Blend processing using the α value is performed. By executing the drawing data synthesizing process, creation of drawing data for displaying an image of one frame on the main display device 41 is completed. As described above, with respect to each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the image data is directly drawn in the frame area to be created among the sub-first frame area 117 and the sub-second frame area 118, so that the 2D When "1" is set in the 2D creation completion flag of the register 93 in the drawing process (FIG. 19), creation of drawing data for displaying an image of one frame on each sub display device 43, 44 is completed. doing.

<Structure for handling drawing list in rendering LSI 85>
Next, a configuration regarding handling of the drawing list in the production LSI 85 will be described. As described above, each of the main display device 41 and each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is provided with two frame areas 114, 115, 117 and 118, respectively. In the situation where the image for the frame is being displayed, drawing data for displaying the image for one frame at the update timing of the next image is created in the other frame area. Further, the image data stored in advance in the memory module 83 is used when creating the drawing data, but the image data used when creating the drawing data is set by the time when the drawing data is created using the image data. The data is transferred to the advance transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86.

The timing at which drawing data is created and the timing at which image data is transferred in advance will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 22A shows the pre-transfer period of the image data, FIG. 22B shows the preparation period of the drawing data, and FIG. 22C shows the update timing of the image of each display device 41, 43, 44. ..

As shown in FIG. 22C, the main display is displayed at each of the timing t1, the timing t2, the timing t3, the timing t4, the timing t5, the timing t6, the timing t7, the timing t8, and the timing t9. The image update in the device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 22B, drawing data is created at each of these timings t1 to t9. These drawing data are drawing data in the frame order corresponding to the next update timing with respect to the frame order corresponding to the current image update timing. For example, at the timing of t1, the image of the kth frame is updated in each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 as shown in FIG. 22C, while the image of the k+1th frame is shown as shown in FIG. Creation of drawing data for displaying the image is started. Since the double buffer method is adopted in each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 as described above, it is not possible to use the drawing data created in one frame area for displaying an image. The drawing data corresponding to the update timing of the next image is created for the frame area.

In the configuration in which images are displayed and drawing data is created on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 as described above, the image data used when creating the drawing data is the drawing data created using the image data. The VRAM 86 is in a state of being read by the VRAM 86 at a timing before the generation start timing. There are multiple types of such pre-transfer. One mode thereof is a mode in which the image data used when creating the drawing data is read out by using the immediately preceding creating period with respect to the creating period of the drawing data created by using the image data. Specifically, at the timing of t1, the creation of the drawing data for displaying the image of the (k+1)th frame is started as shown in FIG. 22(b), while that shown in FIG. 22(a). The reading of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the (k+2)th frame into the VRAM 86 is started. Similarly, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 22B, the creation of the drawing data for displaying the image of the k+2th frame is started, while as shown in FIG. The reading of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the frame is started to the VRAM 86, and at the timing of t3, the image of the k+3th frame is displayed as shown in FIG. 22B. 22A, the reading of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the (k+4)th frame into the VRAM 86 is started as shown in FIG. , T4, the creation of the drawing data for displaying the image of the k+4th frame is started as shown in FIG. 22B, while the creation of the drawing data for the k+5th frame is started as shown in FIG. The reading of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the above into the VRAM 86 is started. According to such an image data reading mode, the data capacity of the image data that needs to be reliably read in the VRAM 86 can be limited to two frames.

Another aspect of the pre-transfer is that the reading period of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for one frame is not limited to the period between one image update timing and the next image update timing, but the drawing is performed. One image update timing while the image data used for creating the data is read into the VRAM 86 at a timing before the creation start timing of the drawing data created using the image data. In this mode, the image data is read so as to extend over the period between the next image update timing and the next image update timing. In other words, in the period between one image update timing and the next image update timing, the reading of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the predetermined frame is completed and This is a mode in which the reading of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the next frame in the order to the eyes is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22B, creation of drawing data for displaying the image of the k+5th frame is started at the timing of t5, and the image of the k+6th frame is displayed at the timing of t6. The drawing data for displaying the image of the k+7th frame is started at the timing of t7, and the drawing data for displaying the image of the k+8th frame is started at the timing of t8. Data creation is started, and drawing data for displaying the image of the k+9th frame is started at the timing of t9, while as shown in FIG. 22A, from the timing of t5 to t9. The image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the image of the k+6th frame to the k+9th frame is read out to the VRAM 86 over the middle of the timing. According to such an image data reading mode, the period required to read the image data required to create the drawing data for displaying the image of the predetermined frame is one image update timing and the next image update timing. Even if the period is longer than the period, it is possible to absorb the excess period by utilizing the vacant time for reading that occurs when the period required for reading the image data is shorter than the period between the image update timings. Becomes

The instruction of the pre-transfer of the image data to the production LSI 85 by the production CPU 82 is performed using the drawing list as already described. Information corresponding to the address of the area of the memory module 83 in which the image data is stored is set in the drawing list transmitted at the stage from the rendering CPU 82 in association with the type of image data required when creating the drawing data. However, the information corresponding to the address of the transfer destination area of the image data in the VRAM 86 is not set. When the image data is transferred to the VRAM 86 by the advance transfer control unit 94 of the production LSI 85, the information corresponding to the address of the area of the memory module 83 in which the image data is stored is the image data of the VRAM 86. It is rewritten with the information corresponding to the address of the transfer destination area. Then, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the production LSI 85 use the drawing list after the address information is rewritten to specify the area in the VRAM 86 from which the image data is read out and from the area. Drawing data is created using the read image data.

An area for storing the drawing list is set in the register 93 of the production LSI 85 in correspondence with the handling of the drawing list. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an area where the drawing list is stored in the register 93 of the production LSI 85.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the register 93, the drawing list transmitted from the rendering CPU 82 is sequentially stored, and the pre-transfer storage area 121 and the drawing list stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121 are stored. The post-transfer storage area 122 in which the drawing list in which the information corresponding to the address of the transfer destination area is overwritten is sequentially stored when the pre-transfer of the image data specified in (4) to the VRAM 86 is completed. And are provided. The storage area 121 for pre-transfer is provided with first to twentieth storage areas 121a-121t before transfer, and the drawing list transmitted from the rendering CPU 82 is sequentially stored in the storage areas 121a-121t. Specifically, when a new drawing list is transmitted from the effect CPU 82 in a situation where the drawing list is stored up to the m-th storage area, the drawing list is stored in the (m+1)-th storage area. When the pre-transfer control unit 94 pre-transfers the image data designated by the drawing list, the pre-transfer is sequentially performed from the drawing list previously stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121. Specifically, the drawing list stored in the first storage area 121a before the transfer becomes the execution target of the pre-transfer, and when the drawing list becomes the execution target of the pre-transfer, the first storage area before the transfer. The drawing list stored in the (m+1)th storage area is shifted to the (m)th storage area after 121a is cleared to “0”. The number of drawing lists that can be stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121 is not limited to 20, and any drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 can be processed by the effect LSI 85. is there. By the way, in order to display an image for one frame on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, as described above, one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame and one frame for 2D. Since one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to image display are used, a maximum of four storage areas among the first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t for pre-transfer display an image for one frame. Used to store a drawing list corresponding to.

The post-transfer storage area 122 is provided with the first to twentieth storage areas 122a to 122t after the transfer, and the drawing in which the pre-transfer of the image data is completed and the address information is rewritten in the pre-transfer control unit 94. The list is sequentially stored in the storage areas 122a to 122t. Specifically, when the pre-transfer of the image data for one drawing list in the pre-transfer control unit 94 is completed in the situation where the drawing list is stored up to the nth storage area, the drawing list has the address information rewritten. After being performed, it is stored in the (n+1)th storage area. When the drawing data is created in the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97, the drawing process is executed in order from the drawing list previously stored in the post-transfer storage area 122. Specifically, the drawing list stored in the post-transfer first storage area 122a becomes the execution target of the drawing process, and when the drawing list becomes the execution target of the drawing process, the first storage after transfer is performed. After the area 122a is cleared to “0”, the drawing list stored in the (n+1)th storage area is shifted to the nth storage area. Note that the number of drawing lists that can be stored in the post-transfer storage area 122 is not limited to 20, and the drawing lists that have been pre-transferred can all be processed by the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. It is optional. By the way, in order to display an image for one frame on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, as described above, one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame and one frame for 2D. Since one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to image display are used, four storage areas of the first to twentieth storage areas 122a to 122t for post-transfer use for image display of one frame. Used to store the corresponding drawing list.

As the post-transfer storage area 122, a storage area group for storing the 2D drawing list and a storage area group for storing the 3D drawing list may be separately provided. In this case, the reading order of the 2D drawing list by the 2D control unit 96 and the reading of the 3D drawing list by the 3D control unit 97 are set in the storage area between the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list. It becomes possible to carry out independently regardless of.

Next, the configuration of the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 to which the image data is pre-transferred and the handling of the image data read in the pre-transfer area 86a will be described. FIG. 24A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the advance transfer area 86a.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the pre-transfer area 86 a is set as a partial area of the VRAM 86. The pre-transfer area 86a has a storage capacity capable of storing and holding a large number of image data at once. Specifically, 256 data storage areas 123 are provided so that 256 image data can be stored and held at one time. All the data storage areas 123 have the same storage capacity, and the storage capacity is a capacity capable of storing the image data of the maximum storage capacity. Further, even when there are a plurality of image data whose total storage capacity is smaller than the storage capacity of one data storage area 123 as a read target to the pre-transfer area 86a, the plurality of image data One image data is read from one data storage area 123.

When the image data is read according to the drawing list, the pre-transfer control unit 94 sequentially changes the data storage area 123, which is the read destination of the image data, in a predetermined order. Specifically, the data storage area 123 is set so that the order of 0th to 255th occurs, and the final address in the kth data storage area 123 is the start in the (k+1)th data storage area 123. It is a serial number with the address. When reading one piece of image data into the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer control unit 94 has the following order with respect to the data storage area 123 that stores the image data to be read in the immediately preceding execution of the pre-transfer. The image data to be read this time is stored in the data storage area 123.

In order to specify the type of the data storage area 123 of the read destination, the register 93 of the production LSI 85 is provided with an identification information counter 124 as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. The identification information counter 124 has a data capacity of 1 byte, and can set any of the information corresponding to the numbers “0” to “255”. When storing one piece of image data in the advance transfer area 86a, the advance transfer control unit 94 stores the image data in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the information set in the identification information counter 124. Then, after storing the image data, the value corresponding to the information set in the identification information counter 124 is incremented by 1, and the storage target of the image data is updated to the data storage area 123 in the next order.

In the configuration in which the 255 data storage areas 123 are provided as described above, in the case where image data is stored in the 255th data storage area 123, the 0th data storage is performed in the next pre-transfer processing time. The area 123 is the transfer destination of the image data. In this case, the image data already read in the 0th data storage area 123 will be erased when new image data is read. However, the number of the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a is set so that the image data whose reading is instructed by the drawing list is not erased without being used when creating the drawing data. Specifically, the pre-transfer mode as shown in the timing from t5 timing to t9 timing in FIG. 22A is an image transferred in advance to the pre-transfer area 86a for the purpose of using it later when creating the drawing data. Although the number of data is the largest, the number of data storage areas 123 is larger than the maximum number of image data assumed in this case. More specifically, the image data for three frames will be read out to the pre-transfer area 86a for the purpose of being used thereafter, but the maximum number of image data assumed as the number of image data for three frames However, the number of data storage areas 123 is large. As a result, even though the image data is pre-transferred according to the predetermined drawing list, the pre-transferred image data is erased from the pre-transfer area 86a at the stage of creating the drawing data corresponding to the predetermined drawing list. It is possible to prevent the situation that the dead end has occurred.

In the configuration in which the 256 data storage areas 123 are provided in the advance transfer area 86a, the transfer instruction of the same image data as the image data already read in any of the data storage areas 123 can be issued by the drawing list. .. In this case, if the image data is purposely read from the memory module 83 and then read to the pre-transfer area 86a, the reading efficiency will be deteriorated. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the image data that is the object of the transfer instruction by the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123, the image data is not read from the memory module 83. Has become.

However, as described above, the pre-transfer control unit 94 refers to the identification information counter 124 of the register 93 to sequentially update the data storage area 123 from which the image data is read in a predetermined order. .. Therefore, when the image data that is the object of the transfer instruction by the drawing list already exists in any of the data storage areas 123, the pre-transfer control unit 94 uses the image data corresponding to the current identification information counter 124. Copy to storage area 123. That is, although the image data is not read from the memory module 83, the data is copied between the data storage areas 123 in the advance transfer area 86a. This makes it possible to read the image data into the data storage area 123 in the order according to the identification information counter 124, and at the same time, improve the reading efficiency of the image data. If the image data that is the object of the transfer instruction by the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the current identification information counter 124, the state is maintained without copying the image data. However, only the identification information counter 124 is updated.

In order to enable the advance transfer control unit 94 to specify whether or not the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction by the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123, the register 93 of the production LSI 85 stores A search table 125 is provided. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125.

As shown in FIG. 25, the search table 125 is configured such that the identification information set in one-to-one correspondence with the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a becomes a serial number in the order of the data storage area 123. The address ID is set in correspondence with each identification information one-to-one. The address ID is data that enables the advance transfer control unit 94 to specify the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123. More specifically, the address ID is information set as the address information of the image data in the drawing list transmitted from the rendering CPU 82, and the address ID is the area in which the corresponding image data is stored in the memory module 83. It corresponds to the start address of. As described above, when the image data instructed in the drawing list is transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer control unit 94 selects the area in which the image data is read from the pre-transfer area 86a. The information corresponding to the address is overwritten on the address information of the drawing list. At that time, in the search table 125, the address ID corresponding to the start address in the address ID group that has been set in the address information of the drawing list is used. The image data is written in the storage area of the address ID corresponding to the identification information of the read data storage area 123. As a result, the address ID of the start address corresponding to the image data stored in the data storage area 123 is set in the search table 125 in association with each data storage area 123. Therefore, the pre-transfer control unit 94 can identify whether or not the image data, which is the target of the transfer instruction, has already been read in the pre-transfer area 86a by referring to the search table 125. In addition, it is possible to specify the type of the data storage area 123 from which the image data has been read if the image data has already been read.

With reference to FIGS. 26A to 26D, the manner in which the address information in the drawing list and the address ID in the search table are rewritten will be described. FIG. 26(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, and FIG. 26(b) is before the pre-transfer of the image data according to the drawing list. FIG. 26C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125 in the situation, and FIG. 26C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing list after the pre-transfer of the image data is completed and the rewriting of the address information is completed. 26D is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125 in the situation after the pre-transfer of the image data according to the drawing list is completed.

As shown in FIG. 26A, in the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, the address information “A253” to “A257” is set as the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is “0”. The ID range is set, the address ID range of "B348" to "B350" is set as the address information corresponding to the image data of which the display order priority data is "1", and the display order priority data is " A range of address IDs "C001" to "C003" is set as the address information corresponding to the image data "2". In this case, the image data whose display order priority data is “0” is stored in the area of the address range corresponding to the range of the address IDs “A253” to “A257” in the memory module 83. The image data of “1” is stored in the area of the address range corresponding to the range of the address IDs of “B348” to “B350” in the memory module 83, and the image data of which the display order priority data is “2” is Will be stored in the area of the address range corresponding to the range of the address IDs “C001” to “C003” in the memory module 83.

When the pre-transfer control unit 94 performs the pre-transfer of the image data specified in the drawing list of FIG. 26A, first, by referring to the search table 125, the pre-transfer target image data is transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a. It is specified whether the data has already been read in any of the data storage areas 123 of. Since the start address of the address ID is used for this identification, if the display order priority data is image data of "0", it is specified whether "A253" is set in the search table 125 and the display order is determined. If the priority data is the image data of "1", it is specified whether or not "B348" is set in the search table 125, and if the display order priority data is the image data of "2", "C001" is searched. Whether or not it is set in the usage table 125 is specified.

According to the drawing list shown in FIG. 26A in the situation where the identification information corresponding to the read-out data storage area 123 of the image data is “123” in the search table 125 of the form shown in FIG. When pre-transferring the image data, the start address (“A253”) of the address ID set for the image data whose display order priority data is “0” is the identification information of “120” in the search table 125. Is set as an address ID corresponding to. Therefore, the advance transfer control unit 94 does not read the image data whose display order priority data is "0" from the memory module 83 to the advance transfer area 86a, but the data storage area corresponding to the identification information "120". The image data stored in 123 is copied to the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information “123”. In this case, the reading efficiency is improved in that it is not necessary to read the image data from the memory module 83. Further, in the search table 125, the information of the address ID corresponding to the identification information of "123" is rewritten to the start address of the address ID of the image data as shown in FIG. By thus rewriting the address ID information of the search table 125, the storage status of the image data in each data storage area 123 can be associated with the content of the search table 125.

Even if the image data is copied in this way, the image data stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information of "120" is stored and held as it is, and the identification of "120" in the search table 125 is performed. The information of the address ID corresponding to the information is maintained at "A253". In this case, the search table 125 has a plurality of pieces of identification information whose address ID information is “A253”, but whether the image data to be pre-transferred has already been read to the pre-transfer area 86a. Since the identification is performed in order from the identification information with the smallest value, when the image data whose start address of the address ID is “A253” is the target of the pre-transfer, the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information with the smallest value. The image data from is to be copied.

On the other hand, for the image data whose display order priority data is "1" and "2", the start address of the address ID is not set in the search table 125 shown in FIG. Therefore, these image data are pre-transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a. Then, when the pre-transfer is completed, the rewriting process of the search table 125 is executed, so that the address ID corresponding to the identification information “124” in the search table 125 as shown in FIG. "B348" is set as the information, and "C001" is set as the information of the address ID corresponding to the identification information of "125" in the search table 125.

When each image data is pre-transferred as described above, the pre-transfer control unit 94 executes the rewriting process of the identification information of the drawing list. In this case, as shown in FIG. 26C, the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is “0” includes the identification information corresponding to the type of the data storage area 123 in which the image data is stored. Is overwritten. Specifically, since the image data whose display order priority data is “0” has been copied to the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information “123”, the address corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is “0”. "123" is overwritten on the information. In addition, an image other than the decoded image data set in the next display order priority data with respect to the display order priority data in which the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is set The address information corresponding to the data is also overwritten with the identification information corresponding to the type of the data storage area 123 in which the image data is stored. The address information corresponding to the decoded image data is set from the beginning with information for identifying the address of the area where the decoded image data is stored in the moving image development area 119.

On the other hand, the image data is stored in the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is “1” or later and the image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not the decoded image data. The identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 is not written, but the data indicating “1” as the offset value is written. In the next transfer processing time after the transfer processing time when the image data is read into the data storage area 123 corresponding to the predetermined identification information, the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information after adding 1 to the predetermined identification information is displayed as an image. It becomes the destination of data transfer. Therefore, in the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later and the image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not the decoded image data, the offset value is "1". Will be written. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for rewriting the address information.

The processing configuration for enabling the pre-transfer of the image data as described above and the rewriting of the drawing list after the pre-transfer will be described below. First, the drawing list output process executed by the effect CPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The drawing list output process is executed as a part of the process of step S507 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14) at the output timing of the drawing list shown in the execution target table for display control. By the way, the output mode of the drawing list from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 is represented by the timings of t1 to t5 in FIG. 22A or the timings of t5 to t9 in FIG. 22A. Whether to adopt the mode is determined in the execution target table for display control.

First, it is determined whether a demo display is being performed on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 (step S901). Demonstration display means a predetermined start waiting period for starting a demonstration without the production for game play or the production for open/close execution mode being started after the production for game play or the production for open/close execution mode is finished. The display effect is started when (for example, 0.1 sec) has elapsed. In the demo display, the first demo period and the second demo period alternately occur. In the first demo period, in the situation where the same background image is displayed on each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 as in the case where the effect for game play is performed, An image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 are performing a predetermined operation is displayed for a predetermined period. In the second demo period, the display of the image in which the symbol performs the predetermined operation in the situation where the predetermined background image is displayed is ended, and the maker name, the model name, or the moving image by the predetermined character is displayed.

Here, the effect for game reproduction is the main state in which a predetermined background image is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 immediately after the supply of the operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started. It starts from a state in which a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the display device 41. On the other hand, when the demonstration display is performed without starting the production for game play immediately after the supply of the operating power to the production CPU 82 is started, each display device 41 in the first demo period. , 43, 44 are in a state in which the predetermined background image is displayed, and an image in which the predetermined symbol that is stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 is performing a predetermined operation is displayed. To be done. Further, even when any type of game-use effect is executed, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 are displayed at the last timing of the game-use effect. In each of them, a predetermined background image is displayed, and in the main display device 41, symbols corresponding to the stop result are stopped and displayed on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Regardless of whether the opening/closing execution mode effect is started after the end of the game turning effect, the previous game turning effect is ended when the next game turning effect is started. It starts from the display state of the image at the timing. Then, when the demo display is performed after the end of the game reproduction effect, in the first demo period, the predetermined background image is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44, and the previous game is performed. When the diversion effect ends, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 are performing a predetermined operation is displayed. That is, in the first demo period of the demo display, the display using the image displayed when starting the next game game effect is performed. Therefore, in the first demo period of the demo display, the image data necessary for starting the next game game effect is read into the pre-transfer area 86a.

When the demo display is being performed (step S901: YES), the value of the demo display counter provided in the work memory 84 is incremented by 1 (step S902). The demonstration-in-progress counter uses the effect CPU 82 to specify that it is the timing to start the first demo period by using all of the image data required to start the game-use effect next time. It is a counter. When the value of the demo display counter after adding 1 is the start reference value of the first demo period (step S903: YES), after clearing the value of the demo display counter to "0" (step S904), the game is played. Data setting is performed so that the image data required to start the diversion effect next time is specified in the drawing list this time (step S905). As a result, even in the situation where the demonstration display is continued, the image data necessary for starting the game reproduction effect next time is regularly used and is read to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86. Becomes

Further, even in a situation where the demo display is not being performed (step S901: NO), the timing before the end when the supply of the operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started or the ending period is executed in the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. If it is (step S906: YES), data setting is performed so that the image data necessary for starting the game game effect next time is designated in the drawing list this time (step S905). When the process of step S905 is executed in the opening/closing execution mode, the use for creating drawing data of the image data required to start the game reproduction effect next time is set as the target of pre-transfer. Not set as a target.

By executing the processing of steps S901 to S906, the image data necessary for starting the game turn effect is stored in the VRAM 86 at least at a timing when the next game turn effect can be started. The data has been read into the pre-transfer area 86a. This situation will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 28(a) shows a timing at which a drawing list gives an instruction to read image data necessary to start the game use effect, and FIG. 28(b) is necessary to start the game use effect. 28C shows a period during which the image data is read out to the pre-transfer area 86a, FIG. 28C shows a period during which a game game effect is executed, and FIG. 28D shows an open/close execution mode effect. 28E shows the period of execution, and FIG. 28E shows the execution period of the demo display.

As the supply of operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started at the timing of t1, the image data necessary for starting the effect for game play is pre-transferred from the memory module 83 as shown in FIG. 28(a). Reading to the area 86a is performed. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the start waiting period elapses without starting the game replaying effect from the timing of t1 and the demo display is started as shown in FIG. 28(e). In the demo display, the first demo period in which the image display using the image data necessary for starting the next game diversion is first started is started. Therefore, at the timing of t2, FIG. As shown in a), the image data necessary to start the game replay effect is read out.

Here, although the data storage area 123 of 256 pieces is provided in the pre-transfer area 86a described above, the data storage area 123 to which the image data is read is pre-transferred when the image data specified by the drawing list is transferred in advance. Is overwritten. On the other hand, as described above, when the image data for which the pre-transfer is designated by the drawing list has already been read into any of the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is stored in the memory module 83. Instead of being read from, the data is stored in the read-out data storage area 123 by copying between the data storage areas 123. In this case, since it is not necessary to read the image data from the memory module 83, it is possible to read the image data to the read-out data storage area 123 early.

In this case, at the timing of t2, the image data necessary for starting the effect for game play pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a at the timing of t1 is stored and held. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83. Further, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123, and the image data is stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the current value of the identification information counter 124. In order to erase from the storage area 123, it is necessary to switch the read target of the image data once in the data storage area 123. That is, as the timing at which the image data necessary for starting the next game reproduction effect is erased from the pre-transfer area 86a, there is a margin for switching the image data read target once in the data storage area 123. It will be.

After that, the first demo period is restarted at the timing of t3 in the situation where the demo display is continued. In this case, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 28A, the image data necessary for starting the effect for game use is read out. The first demo period is restarted when the value of the demo display counter, which is cleared to “0” at the timing when the first demo period was started last time and then periodically updated, reaches the start reference value. This start reference value is set so that the first demo period starts within a range in which all of the image data necessary for starting the next game production effect is stored and held in the advance transfer area 86a. There is. As a result, while the demo display is being executed regardless of the duration of the demo display, any image data necessary for starting the next game-use effect is read into the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. It is in a state of being With such a configuration, at the timing of t3, the image data necessary for starting the game reproduction effect copied between the data storage areas 123 at the timing of t2 is stored. ing. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83. Further, at the timing of t3, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game round is copied between the data storage areas 123, so that the image necessary for starting the effect for the next game round is started. As the timing at which the data is erased from the pre-transfer area 86a, a margin is created for one round of switching of the image data read target in the data storage area 123.

After that, when the condition for starting the game-use effect at the timing of t4 is satisfied, the demo display is ended as shown in FIG. 28(e) and the game-use effect is shown as shown in FIG. 28(c). Is started. In this case, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 28A, the image data necessary for starting the effect for game use is read out. In the first demonstration period of the demo display, as already described, the image data necessary for starting the next game playing effect is read into the pre-transfer area 86a, and during the duration of the demo display. The first demo period is started again so that the state in which the image data is read out to the pre-transfer area 86a is maintained regardless. Therefore, at the timing of t4, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the current game use is stored and held in the data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a. Therefore, at the timing of t4, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 28(c), it becomes the end timing of the effect for game play. In this case, as already described, no matter what type of game-use effect is executed, during the end period of the game-use effect, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second display device A predetermined background image is displayed on each of the sub display devices 44, and the symbols corresponding to the stop result are stopped and displayed on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the main display device 41. That is, the image data for displaying the image is in a state of being read into the data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a. The advance transfer of the image data necessary for displaying the image in the ending period of the game reproduction effect to the data storage area 123 is performed by the advance transfer mode at the timing of t5 to t9 in FIG. 22(a). It is being appreciated. As a result, even if it takes a certain amount of time to transfer the image data necessary for displaying the image in the end period of the effect for game use, the image data will not be displayed for the end period of the effect for game use. It is possible to pre-transfer to the data storage area 123 before the start.

After that, at the timing of t6, a new game diverting effect is started as shown in FIG. 28(c). In this case, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 28(a), the image data necessary for starting the effect for game play is read. As described above, when a new game-use effect is started after the game-use effect is ended, the image display state at the timing when the previous game-use effect is ended is started. In addition, the effect for game use this time is started without the transition to the demo display after the effect for game use for the last time is finished. Therefore, at the timing of t6, the image data necessary for starting the effect for the game use this time is in the state of being read into the data storage area 123. Copying is performed, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83.

After that, at the timing of t7, which is the situation where the effect for game use is being continued, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the image data necessary for executing the reach effect in the effect for game use this time is displayed. By the pre-transfer to the data storage area 123, the image data necessary for starting the game replay effect is deleted from the data storage area 123. However, since the game-use effect is being continued, the image data necessary for starting the game-use effect is used at least until the end of the game-use effect. It does not become.

After that, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 28(c), it becomes the end timing of the effect for game reproduction. In this case, as already described, no matter what type of game-use effect is executed, during the end period of the game-use effect, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second display device A predetermined background image is displayed on each of the sub display devices 44, and the symbols corresponding to the stop result are stopped and displayed on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the main display device 41. That is, the image data for displaying the image is in a state of being read into the data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a. The advance transfer of the image data necessary for displaying the image in the ending period of the game reproduction effect to the data storage area 123 is performed by the advance transfer mode at the timing of t5 to t9 in FIG. 22(a). It is being appreciated. As a result, even if it takes a certain amount of time to transfer the image data necessary for displaying the image in the end period of the effect for game use, the image data will not be displayed for the end period of the effect for game use. It is possible to pre-transfer to the data storage area 123 before the start.

Since the game number of this time corresponds to the jackpot result, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 28(d). After that, at the timing of t9, which is the situation in which the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is continued, as shown in FIG. 28B, the effect for game use read out in the end period of the effect for game use just before is read. The image data required to start the process is deleted from the data storage area 123. However, since the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being continued, at least until the end timing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the image data necessary for starting the effect for game play is used. Situation does not occur.

After that, at the timing of t10, it becomes a predetermined pre-termination timing when the ending period is executed in the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, at the timing of t10, the next game as shown in FIG. 28(a). The image data necessary for starting the diversion effect is read into the data storage area 123. This image data is at least stored and held until the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game time effect or a demonstration display is started.

After that, at the timing of t11, the effect for the open/close execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 28(d), and a new game time effect as shown in FIG. 28(c) starts. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28A, the image data necessary for starting the effect for game play is read at the timing of t11, but the image data is stored in the data storage area 123 at the timing of t10. Since the image data has been read out, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83.

As described above, even if the image data pre-transferred to the data storage area 123 is sequentially erased in accordance with the pre-transfer of other image data, at the timing of starting the game-use effect, the game time is changed. The image data necessary for starting the production for use has already been read into the data storage area 123. As a result, even if it takes a certain period of time to read out the image data necessary for starting the game-use effect from the memory module 83, the game-use time is affected by the read-out period of the image data. It is possible to prevent an event that the start of the production is delayed from occurring.

Returning to the description of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27), when a negative determination is made in step S903, when the process of step S905 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S906, the image data for 2D is aggregated. The process is executed (step S907). In this aggregation processing, all image data to be set in the 2D drawing list in this processing time are specified. In this case, when the process of step S905 has been executed, the image data necessary for starting the effect for game play and which is used in the drawing process of the 2D control unit 96 are aggregated as described above. It is included in the specific targets in processing.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of 2D image data collected in step S907 is equal to or larger than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S908). The reference number is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality. When the number of 2D image data collected in step S907 is less than the reference number (step S908: NO), one 2D drawing list is created (step S909). All of the 2D image data collected in step S907 is set in the one 2D drawing list. Then, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last-order image data in the 2D drawing list (step S910). As described above, the 2D control unit 96 determines whether or not the creation completion data is set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19) to determine whether to display one frame or two 2D images. It specifies that the drawing process is completed for all the image data specified in the drawing list.

On the other hand, when the number of 2D image data collected in step S907 is equal to or larger than the reference number (step S908: YES), two 2D drawing lists are created (step S911). In this case, the 2D image data collected in step S907 is dispersed and set in two 2D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. In each of these two 2D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 2D drawing lists, the 2D control unit 96 sets the creation completion data in the 2D drawing list that is the target of the drawing process later (step S912). Specifically, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 2D drawing list. As described above, the 2D control unit 96 determines whether or not the creation completion data is set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19) to determine whether to display one frame or two 2D images. It specifies that the drawing process is completed for all the image data specified in the drawing list.

As described above, if the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is less than the reference number, those image data are set in one 2D drawing list, and if the number is greater than the reference number, a plurality of 2D drawing is performed. By distributing and setting the image data in the list, the number of image data set in one 2D drawing list can be suppressed to less than the reference number. As a result, even if the number of 2D image data required to display an image for one frame varies, the data capacity of one 2D drawing list can be set to a predetermined capacity or less. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data capacity of one 2D drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 to become extremely large, and accordingly, one 2D drawing list can be saved. It is possible to prevent the transmission period from becoming extremely long.

In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S910 or step S912 is executed, the 3D image data aggregation process is executed (step S913). In this aggregation processing, all the image data to be set in the 3D drawing list in this processing time are specified. In this case, when the process of step S905 is executed, the image data necessary for starting the effect for game play and the image data used in the drawing process of the 3D control unit 97 are aggregated as described above. It is included as a specific target in processing.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of 3D image data collected in step S913 is equal to or larger than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S914). The reference number is arbitrary as long as it is a plurality. If the number of 3D image data collected in step S913 is less than the reference number (step S914: NO), one 3D drawing list is created (step S915). All of the 3D image data collected in step S913 are set in the one 3D drawing list. Then, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last-order image data in the 3D drawing list (step S916). As described above, the 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not the creation completion data is set in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20), and thus, the 3D control unit 97 can display one frame or two 3D images corresponding to one frame of image display. It specifies that the drawing process is completed for all the image data specified in the drawing list.

On the other hand, when the number of 3D image data collected in step S913 is equal to or larger than the reference number (step S914: YES), two 3D drawing lists are created (step S917). In this case, the 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is dispersed and set in two 3D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. The number of image data in each of these two 3D drawing lists is less than the reference number. Then, of the two 3D drawing lists, the 3D control unit 97 sets the creation completion data in the 3D drawing list that is a target for executing the drawing process later (step S918). Specifically, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last-order image data in the 3D drawing list. As described above, the 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not the creation completion data is set in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20), and thus, the 3D control unit 97 can display one frame or two 3D images corresponding to one frame of image display. It specifies that the drawing process is completed for all the image data specified in the drawing list.

As described above, if the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is less than the reference number, the image data is set in one 3D rendering list, and if the number is greater than the reference number, a plurality of 3D renderings are performed. By distributing and setting the image data in the list, the number of image data set in one 3D drawing list can be suppressed to less than the reference number. As a result, even if the number of 3D image data required to display an image for one frame varies, the data capacity of one 3D drawing list can be set to a predetermined capacity or less. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data capacity of one 3D drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 to become extremely large, and accordingly, the amount of data of one 3D drawing list can be increased. It is possible to prevent the transmission period from becoming extremely long.

When the process of step S916 is executed or the process of step S918 is executed, the drawing list of the output target to the production LSI 85 is grasped (step S919). In this case, at least one 2D drawing list and one 3D drawing list are grasped, and at most two 2D drawing lists and two 3D drawing lists are grasped. After that, a process for outputting one drawing list out of the plurality of drawing lists grasped in step S919 to the effect LSI 85 is executed (step S920). Then, when the output of all the drawing lists grasped in step S919 to the production LSI 85 is not completed (step S921: YES), the process of step S920 is executed until the output of all the drawing lists is completed. repeat. As a result, the drawing list for displaying the image for one frame is output.

In this case, one 2D drawing list and one 3D drawing list may be alternately output targets. With this configuration, even if at least one of the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list is two as a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame, the effect LSI 85 does not have the 2D drawing list. The drawing list for 3D and the drawing list for 3D are transmitted alternately. By transmitting the drawing list in this way, the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list are alternately stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121 and the post-transfer storage area 122 in the register 93. Becomes Accordingly, for example, after the 2D control unit 96 reads the 2D drawing list from the first storage area 122a after the transfer in the storage area 122 for the transfer, the 3D drawing list is stored in the first storage area 122a after the transfer. Will be shifted, and the 3D control unit 97 can read the 3D drawing list. Therefore, it is possible for the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 to simultaneously execute the drawing process.

Next, the pre-transfer process executed by the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the production LSI 85 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The pre-transfer control unit 94 executes the pre-transfer process periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec) by using the programs and data stored in advance in the memory module 83. All of these programs and data are read to a register provided inside the advance transfer control unit 94 when the supply of operating power to the production LSI 85 is started. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the pre-transfer control unit 94 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use the programs and data stored in advance in the memory module 83.

In the pre-transfer process, it is first determined whether or not there is a drawing list for which the pre-transfer has not been completed (step S1001). Specifically, when the pre-transfer process for one drawing list has started, but the pre-transfer process for all the image data set in the one drawing list has not been completed, This means that there is a drawing list that has not been transferred. Even when the pre-transfer process for one drawing list is completed, the pre-transfer process is still performed in the pre-transfer storage area 121 (see FIG. 23) in the register 93 of the production LSI 85. If there is a drawing list that is not the execution target, it means that there is a drawing list for which pre-transfer is not completed.

When there is an unfinished drawing list (step S1001: YES), the image data to be pre-transferred in this pre-transfer processing is grasped (step S1002). In this case, when it is the timing of the pre-transfer process for one drawing list, the display order priority data is next to the image data that was the target of the pre-transfer process in the previous processing times in the drawing list. The image data in the order of is grasped as the target of this prior transfer. Further, when it is the start timing of the pre-transfer processing for the new drawing list, the image data in which the display order priority data is first in the drawing list is grasped as the target of this pre-transfer.

When the image data to be pre-transferred which is grasped in step S1002 is the decoded image data created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data (step S1003: YES), steps S1004 to S1015. The process proceeds to step S1016 without executing the process of. On the other hand, when the image data to be pre-transferred which is grasped in step S1002 is not the decoded image data (step S1003: NO), the value of the identification information counter 124 (see FIG. 24B) of the register 93 is set to 1 Add (step S1004). Then, when the value of the identification information counter 124 after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the identification information counter 124 (step S1005: YES), the value of the identification information counter 124 is cleared to “0” (step S1005: YES). S1006).

If a negative determination is made in step S1005, or if the processing of step S1006 is executed, by referring to the address information set in the drawing list in association with the image data of the pre-transfer target grasped in step S1002. , The start address in the range of the address ID corresponding to the image data is grasped (step S1007). Then, by executing the matching process of the search table 125 (FIG. 25), it is determined whether or not the start address is set in correspondence with any identification information of the search table 125 (see FIG. 25). Yes (step S1008).

When it is specified in the matching process that the start address is not set in the search table 125 (step S1009: NO), a read setting process from the memory module 83 is executed (step S1010). Specifically, the range of the address ID set in the address information of the drawing list in correspondence with the image data to be pre-transferred this time is output to the transfer controller 92. Further, in order to make the transfer controller 92 recognize the transfer destination of the pre-transfer target image data, the current value of the identification information counter 124 is output to the transfer controller 92 as identification information in the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. .. As a result, the image data to be pre-transferred this time is read from the memory module 83, and the read image data is written in the data transfer area 123 in the transfer destination area this time. The processing contents of the transfer controller 92 for transferring the image data will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is specified in the matching process of step S1008 that the start address is set in the search table 125 (step S1009: YES), the copy setting process in the pre-transfer area 86a is executed (step S1011). Specifically, the image data stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information having the start address set in the search table 125 is stored in the data storage area corresponding to the current value of the identification information counter 124. An instruction for copying to the area 123 is given to the transfer controller 92. In this case, the identification information corresponding to the copy source data storage area 123 and the identification information corresponding to the copy destination data storage area 123 are output to the transfer controller 92. As a result, the image data to be pre-transferred this time is written to the transfer destination area of this time in the data storage area 123 without reading the image data from the memory module 83.

When the processing of step S1010 or step S1011 is executed, the rewriting processing of the search table 125 is executed (step S1012). Specifically, with respect to the information of the address ID of the search table 125 corresponding to the data storage area 123 which is the transfer destination area this time, the drawing list of the drawing list is made to correspond to the image data to be pre-transferred this time. The information on the start address in the range of the address ID set in the address information is overwritten. As a result, the contents of the search table 125 can be made to match the contents of the type of image data actually stored in each data storage area 123.

After that, on condition that the image data which is the subject of the pre-transfer this time is the moving image data (step S1013: YES), the decoding instruction of the moving image data is given to the moving image decoder 95 of the production LSI 85 ( Step S1014). At the time of this decoding instruction, information for allowing the moving image decoder 95 to specify the area in the data storage area 123 in which the moving image data that is the target of the current decoding instruction is specified, and the information for the moving image in the register 93. The moving image decoder 95 is provided with information for enabling the moving image decoder 95 to specify the area in the expanded area 119 for storing the decoded image data obtained by the decoding process for the moving image data. Thus, the moving image decoder 95 performs the decoding process on the moving image data that is the target of the decoding instruction, and the decoded image data created by the decoding process is placed in the area specified in the moving image expansion region 119. Written.

When a negative determination is made in step S1013, or when the processing of step S1014 is executed, the address information rewriting processing is executed (step S1015). FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the rewriting process of address information.

In the rewriting process of the address information, the image data that is the target of the previous transfer is the image data set corresponding to the first display order priority data in the drawing list, and the decoded image to the immediately preceding display order priority data. It is determined whether the data is any of the set image data (step S1101). If an affirmative decision is made in step S1101, the identification information corresponding to the type of the data storage area 123 in which the image data has been stored this time is added to the address information corresponding to the image data that was the subject of the previous transfer in the drawing list. Is overwritten (step S1102).

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1101, the data indicating that the offset value for the identification information of the data storage area 123 to which the image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is preliminarily transferred is “1”, In the drawing list, it is written in the address information corresponding to the image data that is the subject of the previous transfer. By thus uniformly writing the data indicating that the offset value is “1” instead of writing the identification information, it is possible to reduce the processing load for rewriting the address information. .. On the other hand, with respect to the image data set corresponding to the first display order priority data in the drawing list, the image data is not set earlier than that, so that the address information is overwritten with the identification information as described above. Further, since the decoded image data is stored in the moving image expansion area 119 in the register 93, the address information of the decoded image data is set to the address of the corresponding area in the moving image expansion area 119. Therefore, the address information cannot be specified by the offset value for the image data in which the decoded image data is set in the immediately preceding display order priority data, and thus the address information is overwritten with the identification information as described above.

Returning to the description of the pre-transfer process (FIG. 29 ), if an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, or after the address information rewriting process is executed in step S1015, one drawing list for one drawing list is processed this time. On the condition that the pre-transfer is completed (step S1016: YES), the pre-transfer completion process is executed (step S1017). In the pre-transfer completion processing, the drawing list for which the pre-transfer is completed this time is stored in the storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23) to be stored this time in the post-transfer storage area 122 in the register 93. As a result, the drawing list becomes the execution target of the drawing process by the 2D control unit 96 or the drawing process by the 3D control unit 97 thereafter. Further, in the pre-transfer completion processing, if there is a drawing list for which pre-transfer is not completed in the pre-transfer storage area 121 in the register 93, a new drawing list is created from the pre-transfer first storage area 121a. And the process for shifting the drawing list between the first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t in the pre-transfer storage area 121.

<Effects of Configuration Regarding Handling of Drawing List in Rendering LSI 85>
By transferring the image data stored in advance in the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, when the image data is used in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, it is directly read from the memory module 83. Instead, it may be read from the advance transfer area 86a. In this case, when the predetermined image data is the target of the transfer instruction to the pre-transfer area 86a, if the predetermined image data is not stored in the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer area is transferred from the memory module 83. If the predetermined image data is read to 86a and the predetermined image data is already stored in the pre-transfer area 86a, the predetermined image data is not transferred from the memory module 83. This makes it possible to prevent further transfer of the predetermined image data from the memory module 83 even though the predetermined image data is already stored in the pre-transfer area 86a. It is possible to improve the efficiency of reading image data from the module 83.

When a transfer instruction is issued for image data that has already been read into one of the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. It As a result, it becomes possible to store the image data in the data storage area 123 designated as the transfer instruction, without the need for further reading of the image data from the memory module 83.

A search table 125 in which data corresponding to the type of image data stored in each data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a is set is provided. By referring to the search table 125, a transfer instruction is issued. It is specified whether or not the image data that is the target of (3) is stored in any of the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. As a result, it becomes possible to efficiently specify whether or not the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction has already been read into the pre-transfer area 86a.

When image data is transferred to one of the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, the correspondence relationship between the data storage area 123 that is the transfer destination and the type of image data is reflected. Then, the contents of the search table 125 are updated. As a result, the contents of the search table 125 can be associated with the latest storage state of the pre-transfer area 86a.

An address ID for specifying the area in which the image data is stored in the memory module 83 is set as information corresponding to the image data to be used in the drawing list, and the advance transfer control unit 94 includes the memory module 83. When the image data is transferred from the to the pre-transfer area 86a, the area where the image data is stored in the memory module 83 is specified by using the address ID. In this case, the information set as the address ID is set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123. As a result, when the search table 125 is used to identify whether the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction is stored in the pre-transfer area 86a, the address ID provided in the drawing list is used. Can be used as is. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when the identification is performed.

In the configuration in which a plurality of address IDs corresponding to the areas stored in the memory module 83 are set in the drawing list provided by the rendering CPU 82 in association with one piece of image data to be used, The information set in the search table 125 as information for identifying the type of image data stored in the storage area 123 is only the address ID corresponding to the start address. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information for identifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123 in the search table 125, and whether the image data is stored in the pre-transfer area 86a. It is possible to reduce the processing load when referring to the search table 125 in order to specify whether or not it is.

The image data required to start the game reproduction effect is regularly read out to the pre-transfer area 86a during the demo display, and the pre-transfer area 86a is set at the timing before the end of the opening/closing execution mode. To be read. As a result, even when the image data pre-transferred to the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a is sequentially erased in accordance with the pre-transfer of other image data, the timing for starting the game use effect In the state, the image data necessary for starting the effect for game play has already been read into the data storage area 123. As a result, even if it takes a certain period of time to read out the image data necessary for starting the game-use effect from the memory module 83, the game-use time is affected by the read-out period of the image data. It is possible to prevent an event that the start of the production is delayed from occurring.

When the image data is transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 according to the address ID set in the drawing list provided by the rendering CPU 82, the pre-transfer control unit 94 causes the image in the pre-transfer area 86a. Identification information for specifying the area in which the data is stored is set in the drawing list. As a result, it is not necessary to set both the address ID and the identification information in the drawing list from the beginning, so that the amount of information in the drawing list transmitted from the effect CPU 82 can be suppressed. Further, when the image data is actually transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a, the identification information corresponding to the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data has been transferred is set in the drawing list. It is possible to improve reliability.

When the image data is transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a according to the address ID of the drawing list provided from the rendering CPU 82, the identification information corresponding to the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data has been transferred is displayed. The address ID is overwritten and set as the address information of the drawing list. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the drawing list provided to the 2D control unit 96 or 3D control unit 97 after the transfer of image data is completed.

When the transfer of the image data is completed, the identification information overwritten on the address information in the drawing list has a smaller amount of information than the address ID originally set in the drawing list. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the identification information is overwritten on the address information in the advance transfer control unit 94.

In the register 93, a storage area 121 for pre-transfer that stores the drawing list provided from the CPU 82 for production, and a storage area 122 for post-transfer that stores the drawing list for which identification information has been set by the pre-transfer control unit 94 are stored. And are provided separately. As a result, the areas in which the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82 and the drawing list in which the image data is transferred in advance and the identification information is set are clearly distinguished from each other. It is possible to make a clear distinction.

The decoded image data created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data is stored in the moving image expansion area 119 in the register 93. In this case, the decoded image data is excluded from the subject of the pre-transfer to the pre-transfer area 86a by the pre-transfer control unit 94, and the setting process of the identification information to the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advance transfer control unit 94 from unnecessarily executing the information setting for the address information of the drawing list.

In the drawing list, the offset value is "1" in the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later and the image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not the decoded image data. The data indicating that it is "is written. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for rewriting the address information.

In the configuration in which the image data is stored in a plurality of areas in the VRAM 86, when the transfer of the image data to the VRAM 86 is completed, the identification information corresponding to the plurality of areas is set in the address information of the drawing list. In this case, since the plurality of areas in the VRAM 86 are specified as a group of storage areas by using the identification information, compared with the structure in which all the addresses corresponding to the plurality of areas are set, the advance transfer control unit 94. In, it is possible to suppress the amount of information set in the address information of the drawing list.

A plurality of drawing lists are provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the information amount of one drawing list provided from the effect CPU 82 from becoming extremely large, and various information is mixed in one drawing list. It is possible to prevent the processing load of the production LSI 85 from increasing.

The information necessary for causing the 2D control unit 96 to execute the 2D drawing process is provided as a 2D drawing list from the rendering CPU 82, and the information necessary for causing the 3D control unit 97 to execute the 3D drawing process is for the 3D. It is provided from the rendering CPU 82 as a drawing list. As a result, it is possible to identify whether the image data to be used corresponds to 2D drawing processing or 3D drawing processing in units of drawing lists. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the type of image data is specified in the production LSI 85.

When the number of 2D image data to be used is equal to or more than the reference number at one update timing, the 2D image data is set in a plurality of 2D drawing lists in a distributed manner. Further, when the number of 3D image data to be used is equal to or larger than the reference number at one update timing, the 3D image data is dispersed and set in a plurality of 3D drawing lists. As a result, the information amount of one drawing list provided from the effect CPU 82 can be suppressed to a certain amount, and the transmission period of one drawing list is prevented from becoming extremely long. Is possible.

Even when a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists are provided to display an image at one update timing, the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists are The creation completion data for enabling the production LSI 85 to specify that they are collectively used at the update timing is set in the last-order 2D drawing list or the last-order 3D drawing list. As a result, the production LSI 85 can recognize that the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists are for displaying an image at one update timing.

The function of performing the pre-transfer of the image data according to the drawing list provided from the rendering CPU 82 is assigned to the pre-transfer control unit 94, and the function of creating the drawing data according to the drawing list is the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97. Assigned to. This makes it possible to disperse the processing load as compared with a configuration in which these processes are collectively executed by one control unit.

The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 execute the drawing process using the drawing list for which the pre-transfer of the image data has been completed by the pre-transfer control unit 94. This makes it possible to distribute the functions of each processing to a plurality of control means without providing a plurality of the same drawing list from the effect CPU 82.

<Configuration regarding transfer controller 92>
Next, a configuration for transferring data in the transfer controller 92 of the production LSI 85 will be described.

As described above, the image data is pre-transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 under the control of the pre-transfer control unit 94, and the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 pre-transfer the VRAM 86 when creating the drawing data. The image data is read from the area 86a, and the moving image decoder 95 reads the moving image data from the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 when decoding the moving image data. In addition to the reading of image data, the light emission decoder 101 pre-transfers the light emission data from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 in the decoding process of the light emission data, and reads the pre-transferred light emission data from the VRAM 86. Further, the sound decoder 103 pre-transfers the sound output data from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 when decoding the sound output data, and reads the pre-transferred sound output data from the VRAM 86. The process of reading these various data is executed by the transfer controller 92.

Here, as described above, in the drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85, as the address information of the image data, the address ID corresponding to the physical address of the memory module 83 in which the image data is stored is set. However, the physical address itself is not set. As described above, the memory module 83 has data other than the image data set therein, and also has an area in which no data is stored. Then, a part of the area of the memory module 83 is used as an area for storing the image data, and accordingly, the address range of the area storing the image data is the entire address range of the memory module 83. It is a narrower range. In such a configuration, the address ID designated as address information in the drawing list is information for specifying only the area in the memory module 83 where the image data is stored. In this case, the number of address IDs that can be used is smaller than the number of physical addresses of the memory module 83, and accordingly, the data capacity for designating one address ID is also the data capacity for designating a physical address. Will be smaller than. Since the data capacity for designating one address ID becomes smaller, the data capacity of the address information designated in the drawing list can be made smaller, and as a result, the data capacity of the drawing list can be made smaller. Is possible.

Since the pre-transfer control unit 94 uses the address ID as information for specifying the address of the area where the image data is stored in the memory module 83, the image data from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is used. When the read instruction is issued to the transfer controller 92, the address ID is provided to the transfer controller 92. In the transfer controller 92, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 31, a file table 126 defining the correspondence between the address ID and the physical address is set. The file table 126 has a one-to-one correspondence with the address IDs (ID(0), ID(1), ID(2),..., ID(n+2)) and the physical address (AD(0 ), AD(1), AD(2),..., AD(n+2)) are set. The transfer controller 92 identifies the physical address of the memory module 83 corresponding to the address ID designated by the pre-transfer controller 94 by referring to the file table 126, and reads the image data from the identified physical address area. I do.

The above address conversion in the transfer controller 92 is performed not only for the memory module 83 but also for the VRAM 86. The contents will be described below. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the VRAM 86 and the index area.

As shown in FIG. 32, the VRAM 86 is divided into a plurality of index areas 127a to 127c. Specifically, it is divided into three areas, a first index area 127a, a second index area 127b, and a third index area 127c. The area included in the first index area 127a is an area where physical addresses are continuous in the area of the VRAM 86, and the area included in the second index area 127b is an area where physical addresses are continuous in the area of the VRAM 86. The area not included in the first index area 127a and the area included in the third index area 127c are areas where physical addresses are continuous in the area of the VRAM 86, and are the first index area 127a and the second index area 127b. This area is not included in. The final address of the area included in the first index area 127a is continuous with the start address of the area included in the second index area 127b, and the final address of the area included in the second index area 127b is continuous. The address is continuous with the start address of the area included in the third index area 127c. The first index area 127a is used as an area to which the light emission data is pre-transferred, and the second index area 127b is used as an area to which the sound output data is pre-transferred. In addition, the third index area 127c is used as an area in which image data is transferred in advance. That is, the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is the third index area 127c.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index table 128 that defines the correspondence relationship between each of the index areas 127a to 127c and the physical address of the VRAM 86. The index table 128 is set in the transfer controller 92.

As shown in FIG. 33, identification information is set in each of the first index area 127a, the second index area 127b, and the third index area 127c. The identification information of the first index area 127a is used when the light emission decoder 101 reads the light emission data into the VRAM 86, when the transfer controller 92 is designated as the read-out area of the light emission data in the VRAM 86, and the light emission is performed. This is used when the light emission data is read from the VRAM 86 by the data decoder 101 and the transfer controller 92 is instructed to the read source area of the light emission data in the VRAM 86. The identification information of the second index area 127b is used when the sound decoder 103 reads the sound output data to the VRAM 86, when the transfer controller 92 is designated as an area to which the sound output data is read in the VRAM 86, and When the audio decoder 103 reads the sound output data from the VRAM 86, the decoder 103 is used to instruct the transfer controller 92 of the area from which the sound output data is read in the VRAM 86. The identification information of the third index area 127c is used when the pre-transfer control unit 94 reads the image data to the VRAM 86 and when instructing the transfer controller 92 which area to read the image data from in the VRAM 86, and the 2D control. When the image data is read from the VRAM 86 in the unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, it is used to instruct the transfer controller 92 of the area from which the image data is read in the VRAM 86. It is also used by the pre-transfer control unit 94 to instruct the transfer controller 92 of the storage source and storage destination areas of image data when copying image data between the data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86. To be done.

The identification information of each of the first index area 127a, the second index area 127b, and the third index area 127c is associated with an area of a plurality of consecutive physical addresses in the VRAM 86. For example, the identification information of "0" in the first index area 127a is associated with the area of five consecutive physical addresses A(0) to A(4), and "0" in the second index area 127b. Identification information is associated with the area of five consecutive physical addresses A(640) to A(644), and the identification information of "0" in the third index area 127c is A(1920) to A(1920). 1924) is associated with the area of five consecutive physical addresses. The number of physical addresses associated with each piece of identification information is 5 and is constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of physical addresses associated with the identification information may be different for each type of the index areas 127a to 127c.

When there are a plurality of physical addresses associated with one piece of identification information in this way, when instructing the transfer controller 92 to read data from or read data from the VRAM 86, the instructing side It is possible to specify areas corresponding to a plurality of physical addresses by specifying only one piece of identification information without specifying a plurality of physical addresses. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity required to specify the area.

The number of identification information set in the first index area 127a is 128, whereas the number of identification information set in the second index area 127b and the identification information set in the third index area 127c. The number of information is 256 each. That is, the number of set identification information differs depending on the type of the index areas 127a to 127c. Further, as described above, since the number of physical addresses associated with each piece of identification information is the same, the physical address of the VRAM 86 assigned to each index area 127a to 127c according to the type of the index areas 127a to 127c. The total number of is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pieces of identification information set in each index area 127a to 127c may be the same, and the physical address of the VRAM 86 assigned to each index area 127a to 127c. May be configured so that the total number of the same is the same.

In the configuration in which the index areas 127a to 127c are set as described above, when the transfer controller 92 receives a data read instruction to the VRAM 86 or a data read instruction from the VRAM 86, the transfer controller 92 determines which of the types of objects the instruction has been made. Of the index areas 127a to 127c are specified. Specifically, the transfer controller 92 specifies the first index area 127a as a read target when receiving an instruction from the light emission decoder 101, and the second index area when receiving an instruction from the sound decoder 103. 127b is specified as a read target, and the third index area 127c is specified as a read target when an instruction is received from any of the pre-transfer control unit 94, the 2D control unit 96, and the 3D control unit 97. The transfer controller 92 may have any configuration for specifying the object receiving the instruction, but, for example, data for giving the instruction to the transfer controller 92 has information for identifying the side giving the instruction. Possible configurations. Since the side giving the instruction to the transfer controller 92 specifies only the identification information without specifying the type of the index areas 127a to 127c, it is necessary for the side giving the instruction to specify the area to the transfer controller 92. It is possible to reduce the data capacity.

The transfer execution process executed by the transfer controller 92 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the transfer controller 92 is provided as a dedicated circuit in which a circuit for executing the transfer execution process is set in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the program and data stored in the memory module 83 or the like can be stored in the transfer controller 92. The configuration may be provided as a general-purpose circuit that utilizes the transfer execution process.

In the transfer execution process, if the read instruction of the data from the memory module 83 is received (step S1201: YES), if the read instruction is received from the advance transfer control unit 94 (step S1202: YES), the advance execution is performed. The physical address of the memory module 83 corresponding to the address ID received from the transfer control unit 94 is specified by referring to the file table 126 (step S1203). On the other hand, when the read instruction is received from a device other than the advance transfer control unit 94, the physical address of the memory module 83 is received from the side issuing the read instruction.

After that, the type of the index areas 127a to 127c is specified from the type of the target for which the read instruction is given, and the identification information received from the side giving the read instruction is specified. Then, the physical address group of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the combination of the type of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information is specified from the index table 128 (step S1204).

After that, a process of starting reading from the memory module 83 is executed (step S1205). In this case, an address signal for specifying the physical address of the area in which the data to be read is stored in the memory module 83 and a data read instruction signal are transmitted to the memory module 83. As a result, the data to be read this time is output from the memory module 83. Then, the output data is written in the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the physical address group specified in step S1204.

When the reading of the data to be read this time is completed (step S1206: YES), “1” is set to the corresponding read completion flag provided in the register 93 (step S1207). As a result, the side which gives the read instruction specifies that the reading of the data to be read into the VRAM 86 is completed. It should be noted that when the side that gives the read instruction specifies that the reading of the data to be read is completed, the read completion flag is cleared to "0".

In the transfer execution process, when the instruction to read the data from the VRAM 86 is received (step S1208: YES), the type of the index areas 127a to 127c is specified from the type of the target for which the reading instruction is issued, and the reading instruction is issued. Identify the identification information received from the user. Then, the physical address group of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the combination of the type of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information is specified from the index table 128 (step S1209). Further, the information on the area to be written which is received from the side giving the read instruction is specified (step S1210). In this case, the register 93 can be cited as an area to be written. When image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a under the control of the pre-transfer control unit 94, the area to be written is the data storage area 123, that is, the third index area 127c. ..

After that, a process for starting reading from the VRAM 86 is executed (step S1211). In this case, an address signal for specifying the physical address group specified in step S1209 and a data read instruction signal are transmitted to the VRAM 86. As a result, the data to be read this time is output from the VRAM 86. Then, the output data is written in the write target area specified in step S1210.

When the reading of the data to be read this time is completed (step S1212: YES), "1" is set to the corresponding read completion flag provided in the register 93 (step S1213). As a result, the side giving the read instruction specifies that the reading of the data to be read from the VRAM 86 is completed. It should be noted that when the side that gives the read instruction specifies that the reading of the data to be read is completed, the read completion flag is cleared to "0".

<Effects of Configuration Regarding Transfer Controller 92>
Each area of the VRAM 86 is divided into a plurality of index areas 127a to 127c, and each area included in each index area 127a to 127c is specified by using the identification information set for each index area 127a to 127c. It is possible. Then, when it is necessary to read data from the VRAM 86 in the control execution unit such as the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, the transfer controller 92 is instructed to the type of the index areas 127a to 127c and the index areas 127a to 127c. The transfer controller 92 specifies the area of the VRAM 86 in which the data to be read is stored by designating the identification information set in (1). As a result, the control execution unit can reduce the amount of information required to specify the area from which data is to be read.

The identification information of 1 in each of the index areas 127a to 127c is information for collectively designating a plurality of areas of the VRAM 86. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information required to specify the area from which data is to be read, as compared with the case where the address is specified for each of the plurality of areas and the data is read from the plurality of areas.

A plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 included in one index area 127a to 127c are areas where addresses are continuous. A plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 designated by one piece of identification information are areas where addresses are continuous. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the area of the VRAM 86 designated by the type of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information.

The correspondence relationship of the area of the VRAM 86 to the combination of the type information of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information of each index area 127a to 127c is set in the index table 128, and the transfer controller 92 refers to the index table 128. Thus, the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the above combination is specified. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for identifying the area of the VRAM 86 that is the data read target in the transfer controller 92.

A plurality of index areas 127a to 127c are set. This makes it possible to set the index areas 127a to 127c corresponding to the respective purposes. Further, the number of areas of the VRAM 86 included in the index areas 127a to 127c differs depending on the type. As a result, the size of the index areas 127a to 127c can be made suitable for each purpose.

<Structure for displaying images on the plurality of display devices 41, 43, 44>
Next, a configuration for collectively updating the images on the plurality of display devices 41, 43, 44 at the image update timing will be described.

As described above, the image is updated in all of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 at each update timing. The rendering list is output from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85 in order to update the image. Instead, the image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 are collectively set in one or two drawing lists. This makes it possible to reduce the number of drawing lists as compared with a configuration in which drawing lists are individually created for each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44.

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of one drawing list in which the image data corresponding to the respective display devices 41, 43, 44 are aggregated and set. As shown in FIG. 35, as the image data for the background image that is the target of the drawing instruction, the first background image data for the main, the first background image data for the first sub, and the first background image data for the second sub. Background image data, second background image data for main, second background image data for first sub, second background image data for second sub, third background image data for main, and Third background image data for the first sub and third background image data for the second sub are set. The first to third background image data for main are image data for displaying a background image on the main display device 41, and the first to third background image data for first sub are displayed on the first sub display device 43. The first to third background image data for the second sub are image data for displaying the background image, and the first to third background image data for the second sub are image data for displaying the background image on the second sub display device 44. In addition, in each of the main, first sub, and second sub, the first background image data is the image data corresponding to the image displayed so as to exist at the innermost side, and the second background image data Is image data corresponding to the image displayed as existing on the front side, and the third background image data is image data corresponding to the image displayed on the front side. ..

As described above, display order priority data indicating the drawing order of image data, parameter information, and address information are set in the drawing list for each image data to be drawn. However, in a configuration in which image data corresponding to two or more display devices 41, 43, 44 is set for one drawing list, the image data specified in the drawing list is displayed in which display device 41, 43. , 44 is not set in the drawing list. Instead, the display order priority data, which is data for indicating the drawing order of the image data, is used to specify the type of the display device 41, 43, 44 to which each image data is drawn.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, for image data such as the main first to third background image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the value of the display order priority data is the first display target reference value. It is set to less than "100". Further, regarding the image data such as the first to third background image data for the first sub corresponding to the first sub display device 43, the value of the display order priority data is “100” or more which is the first display target reference value. Is set to less than “200” which is the second display target reference value. For image data such as the first to third background image data for the second sub corresponding to the second sub display device 44, the value of the display order priority data is set to "200" or more, which is the second display target reference value. Has been done.

The 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the rendering LSI 85 grasp the value of the display order priority data in relation to the first display target reference value and the second display target reference value, and thereby the target of the drawing instruction in the drawing list. It is possible to know which of the display devices 41, 43 and 44 the corresponding image data corresponds to. As described above, the display order priority data is used to specify the type of the display device 41, 43, or 44 to which each image data is to be drawn, so that the image data corresponds to which display device 41, 43, or 44. There is no need to set dedicated data indicating whether or not the drawing list is used. As a result, the data structure of the drawing list can be simplified. By the way, the maximum number of image data set as a drawing target on the main display device 41 in one drawing list is less than or equal to the first display target reference value (100 or less), and is the first in one drawing list. The maximum number of image data set as a drawing target on the sub display device 43 is less than or equal to the difference between the second display target reference value and the first display target reference value (100 or less).

The drawing data as described above is created by the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) in the effect CPU 82, but the information referred to for creating the drawing list is the execution target table for display control as already described. Is set to. The effect CPU 82 derives various data to be set in the drawing list by referring to the display control execution target table in the display control task process (step S506) in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution target table for display control. As shown in FIG. 36A, in the execution target table for display control, information on the contents of tasks is set in one-to-one correspondence with pointer information. The pointer information is information for the production CPU 82 to specify which task content information should be referred to at each processing time in the display control task processing (step S506). When the new execution target table for display control is to be used, the information on the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information “0” is referred to, and then the processing for the display control task (step S506) is performed. Every time a new execution is performed, the pointer information to be referred to is updated so that 1 is added, and the task processing for display control is performed by referring to the information of the task content corresponding to the updated pointer information. Is executed. The task content information includes the type of image data required to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing, and the information required to derive various parameters applied to those image data. ing.

As described above, since the image is updated in all of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 at each update timing, the information of the task content corresponding to each pointer information is displayed. Is the type of image data necessary to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing for all of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44, and the image data. Information necessary for deriving various parameters applied to is set. FIG. 36B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the data for the background image set in the content of one task in the execution target table for predetermined display control.

As the information on the content of the task, each image data is not set as it is, but the information on the address ID corresponding to each image data is set as the information on the type of image data. The information of this address ID is set as the address information of the drawing list. In addition, a combination of display target data, display order data, and other information is set for each piece of image data type information. The other information is information used to derive various parameters applied to each image data.

The display target data and the display order data are information used for deriving the display order priority data in the drawing list. Specifically, the display target data is data for the production CPU 82 to specify which of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 the display device to be displayed is. is there. Specifically, the display target data “0” corresponds to the main display device 41, the display target data “1” corresponds to the first sub display device 43, and the display target data “2”. Corresponds to the second sub display device 44. The display order data is data for the rendering CPU 82 to specify the drawing order on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be displayed. In each of the display devices 41, 43 and 44, the display order data “0” indicates that it is the image data corresponding to the image displayed as if it exists at the innermost side, and the display order data “1” is It indicates that the image data corresponds to the image displayed as if it exists on the front side, and "2" of the display order data corresponds to the image displayed as if it exists on the front side. Indicates that it is image data.

The rendering CPU 82 sets the display order data as it is as the display order priority data of the drawing list for the image data whose display target data is “0”. As a result, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as “0”, “1”, and “2” are set as the display order priority data for the main first to third background image data. In addition, for the image data whose display target data is "1", the effect CPU 82 adds the value of the display order data to the value of the first display target reference value "100" as the display order priority data of the drawing list. Set. As a result, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as "100", "101", and "102" are set as the display order priority data for the first to third background image data for the first sub. In addition, for the image data whose display target data is “2”, the effect CPU 82 adds the value of the display order data to the value of the second display target reference value “200” as the display order priority data of the drawing list. Set. Thus, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as “200”, “201”, and “202” are set as the display order priority data corresponding to the first to third background image data for the second sub.

As described above, in the content information of the task, display target data for designating the type of the display device 41, 43, 44 to be rendered and display for designating the rendering order of the image data on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44. Sequential data and are set. As a result, in the process of creating the execution target table for display control in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the designer has the type of the display device 41, 43, 44 to be displayed and the image data in each display device 41, 43, 44. It suffices to set the respective pieces of information as they are grasped while grasping the drawing order, and it is not necessary to grasp the offset value corresponding to each display device 41, 43, 44 in the display order priority data of the drawing list. Therefore, the design work can be facilitated, and the efficiency of the design work can be improved accordingly.

Further, even when the display target data and the display order data are set instead of the display order priority data in the designing stage, the display device 41 to be displayed in the drawing list, The display order priority data is used to distinguish between 43 and 44. As a result, it is not necessary to set dedicated data indicating which of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 the image data corresponds to in the drawing list, so that the data structure of the drawing list can be simplified. Become.

Hereinafter, the processing content for setting the display order priority data of the drawing list using the display target data and the display order data will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the drawing list creation processing executed by the effect CPU 82. The drawing list creation process is executed when one drawing list is created in each of step S909, step S911, step S915, and step S917 in the drawing list output process (FIG. 27).

First, the write target pointer update process in the current drawing target drawing list is executed (step S1301). The write target pointer is information referred to by the effect CPU 82 for specifying an area in which the display order priority data, the parameter information, and the address information are set in the drawing list to be created this time. When starting the creation of one new drawing list, the write target pointer is updated so that the value corresponds to the area in the first order in the drawing list, and thereafter, the processing of step S1301 is executed. Each time the writing is performed, the value of the write target pointer is incremented by 1.

After that, in the image data that is the setting target of the drawing list this time, the image data whose display target data set in the content of the current task in the execution target table for display control is “0” It is determined whether or not exists (step S1302). Specifically, if the 2D drawing list is the creation target, the display target data is “0” in the various image data specified in step S907 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27). It is determined whether or not there is image data that has become. If the 3D drawing list is the creation target, the display target data is “0” in the various image data specified in step S913 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27). It is determined whether image data exists. The processing contents are the same in step S1304 described later.

When there is image data whose display target data is “0” (step S1302: YES), the display order data corresponding to the image data is set as the display order priority data (step S1303). Specifically, if there is only one image data whose display target data is “0”, the display order set for the content of this task in the execution target table for display control for that image data. The data is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer. If there are a plurality of image data whose display target data is “0”, the image data having the smallest display order data is selected from the image data, and the image data corresponding to the image data is selected. The display order data to be set is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer.

If there is no image data for which the display target data is “0” (step S1302: NO), the execution target table for display control is included in the image data for which the drawing list is set this time. In step S1304, it is determined whether or not there is image data whose display target data set in the content of the current task is “1”. When there is image data whose display target data is "1" (step S1304: YES), the first display target reference value "100" is set to the display order data corresponding to the image data. The added value is set as the display order priority data (step S1305). Specifically, if there is only one piece of image data whose display target data is “1”, the display order set for the content of this task in the execution target table for display control is set for that image data. A value obtained by adding “100” which is the first display target reference value to the data is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer. Further, if there are a plurality of image data whose display target data is “1”, the image data having the smallest display order data is selected from the image data and corresponding to that image data. The value obtained by adding the first display target reference value “100” to the display order data to be set is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer.

When the image data whose display target data is “1” does not exist (step S1304: NO), it means that only the image data whose display target data is “2” exists. In this case, the process of setting the value obtained by adding the second display target reference value “200” to the display order data corresponding to the image data as the display order priority data is executed (step S1306). Specifically, if there is only one image data whose display target data is “2”, the display order set for the content of this task in the execution target table for display control is set for that image data. A value obtained by adding "200" which is the second display target reference value to the data is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer. Further, if there are a plurality of image data whose display target data is “2”, the image data having the smallest display order data is selected from the image data, and the corresponding image data is selected. A value obtained by adding the second display target reference value “200” to the display order data to be set is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer.

According to the above processing, the display order priority data corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 is displayed in a certain processing mode by using the display target data and the display order data set in the task content. It is possible to set it in the drawing list. Further, since the display target data becomes the setting target of the drawing list in order from the image data having the smallest value, the drawing list is set in the order of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44. Is possible.

In the drawing list creation process, when any one of step S1303, step S1305, and step S1306 is executed, the parameter information setting process is executed (step S1307), and the address information setting process is executed (step S1308). ). In the parameter information setting process, the parameter information derived in the immediately preceding display control task process (step S506) for the image data for which the display order priority data has been set this time corresponds to the current write target pointer. Set as area parameter information. In the address information setting process, for the image data for which the display order priority data has been set this time, the address ID set in the content of the current task in the display control execution target table is used as the current write target pointer. Set as address information of the area corresponding to.

After that, it is determined whether there is another image data to be written (step S1309). Specifically, if the 2D drawing list is the creation target, the various image data specified in step S907 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) is the one 2D drawing list of this time. It is determined whether or not there is image data that is not the execution target of step S1302 to step S1308 among the various image data that is the setting target of. Further, if the 3D drawing list is the creation target, the various image data specified in step S913 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) and set to this 3D drawing list this time. It is determined whether or not there is image data that is not the execution target of steps S1302 to S1308 among the various types of target image data. When the image data that is not the execution target exists (step S1309: YES), after executing the update process of the write target pointer (step S1301), the step S1302 is performed on the image data that is not the execution target. ~ The process of step S1308 is executed. As a result, the combination of the display order priority data, the parameter information, and the address information in the current drawing list is set for all of the image data set in the current drawing list. ..

<Effect of Configuration for Displaying Image on Multiple Display Devices 41, 43, 44>
In the configuration in which the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 are provided, information for displaying an image on the plurality of display devices 41, 43, 44 includes one drawing list ( Hereinafter, the drawing list is provided to the effecting LSI 85 from the effecting CPU 82 in a state where the drawing list is integrated into an aggregated drawing list. This makes it possible to reduce the number of drawing lists provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 as compared with the configuration in which the drawing lists are individually provided for each of the plurality of display devices 41, 43, and 44.

Information for displaying an image on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 at the same update timing is aggregated and set in the aggregated drawing list. In this case, the production LSI 85 may handle all the information set in the aggregated drawing list as information for displaying an image at one update timing, and corresponds to which update timing among a plurality of different update timings. It is not necessary to execute the process for determining whether it is information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing executed by using the integrated drawing list in the production LSI 85.

Image data designated as a target to be used by using the display order priority data for specifying the setting order of the image data in the frame areas 114, 115, 117 and 118 by the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. Which display device 41, 43, 44 corresponds to is identified. As a result, it is not necessary to set dedicated information for designating the types of the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set in the aggregate drawing list, and thus the number of types of information set in the aggregate drawing list is suppressed. It becomes possible.

The image data corresponding to the main display device 41 has a value less than the first display target reference value set as the display order priority data, and the image data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 sets the display order priority data as the first display target reference data. A value greater than or equal to the value and less than the second display target reference value is set, and the image data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44 is set as the display order priority data with a value equal to or greater than the second display target reference value. As a result, in the configuration in which the type of the display device 41, 43, 44 to be set is designated by using the display order priority data, the image data designated as the use target is displayed in which display device 41, 43, 44. Whether they correspond is clearly distinguished in the display order priority data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the type of the display device 41, 43, 44 to be set in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97.

In the configuration in which the effect CPU 82 creates the drawing list based on the information set in the display control execution target table, the display order priority data is not set as it is in the display control execution target table. , The display target data corresponding to the types of the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set, and the frame regions 114, 115, 117 in the plurality of types of image data to be used by the display devices 41, 43, 44. The display order data corresponding to the setting order to 118 is set, and the display order priority data is derived by using the display target data and the display order data. Thus, when setting the execution target table for display control in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the types of the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set and the plurality of display devices 41, 43, 44 to be used. It suffices to set only the setting order in the types of image data, and it is not necessary to set the final display order priority data. Therefore, the design work can be facilitated.

For the image data corresponding to the first sub display device 43, the value obtained by adding the first display target reference value to the display order data is derived as the display order priority data, and the image corresponding to the second sub display device 44 is obtained. Regarding the data, the value obtained as a result of adding the second display target reference value to the display order data is derived as the display order priority data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the display order priority data.

<Structure related to display output to each sub-display device 43, 44>
Next, a configuration for outputting an image signal to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 will be described.

As described above, the production LSI 85 is provided with the second display circuit 99 as a circuit for outputting an image signal to each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for outputting an image signal to each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. As shown in FIG. 38, the second display circuit 99 is provided with a first output section 131 and a second output section 132. An image signal is output from the first output unit 131 to the first sub display device 43, and an image signal is output from the second output unit 132 to the second sub display device 44. At the time of outputting these image signals, of the sub first frame area 117 and the sub second frame area 118 provided in the register 93 of the production LSI 85, the frame area 117 to which the current image signal is output, The drawing data created in 118 is referred to. In this case, only one sub first frame area 117 and one sub second frame area 118 are provided, and the double buffer method is adopted as described above, so the sub first frame area 117 is used. 117 and the second sub-frame area 118, the next update timing in the other frame area in the situation where the drawing signal is output to each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 based on the drawing data created in one frame area. The drawing data for displaying the image in is created. That is, an image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 is displayed and an image for one frame on the second sub display device 44 is displayed by one drawing data created in one frame area 117, 118. Is displayed.

FIG. 39 shows a state in which one drawing data is created to display an image of one frame on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44, and each sub display device 43 is used by using the one drawing data. , 44 are each an explanatory view for explaining a state in which an image for one frame is displayed. Note that in FIG. 39, only one image data is used to display an image for one frame on the first sub display device 43, and at the same time, one image for one frame is displayed on the second sub display device 44. The case where only one image data is used will be described, but the same applies to the case where a plurality of image data is used to display an image for one frame on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. ..

The data shown in FIG. 39( a) is data that schematically shows the image data 133 for displaying an image of one frame on the first sub-display device 43, and the data shown in FIG. 39( b) is the second data. This is data that schematically shows image data 134 for displaying an image for one frame on the sub display device 44. These image data 133 and 134 are previously stored in the memory module 83 as described above, and these image data 133 and 134 exist as individual data in the state of being stored in the memory module 83. These image data 133 and 134 are image data for 2D images, and are set as quadrangular data having a plurality of pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. In the following description, the image data 133 will be referred to as the first sub image data 133, and the image data 134 will be referred to as the second sub image data 134.

FIG. 39(c) is a diagram schematically showing one frame area 117, 118 in which one drawing data for displaying an image of one frame on each of the sub display devices 43, 44 is created. is there. The one frame area 117, 118 is set as a rectangular data area in which a plurality of dots exist in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. In this case, the number of dots in the vertical direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to the number of dots in the vertical direction of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 in the situation where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial position. There is. Specifically, the number of dots in the vertical direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 is predetermined to be the number of dots in the vertical direction of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial position. It matches the value obtained by integrating the number (specifically, “1”). The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are display devices having the same number of dots, and both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged at the initial position. In each of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the number of dots in the vertical direction is the same, and the number of dots in the horizontal direction of each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is also the same.

On the other hand, the number of dots in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 is the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions. This corresponds to the sum of the number of dots in the horizontal direction of 44. Specifically, the number of dots in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 is equal to the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the first sub display device 43 and the second number of dots in the situation in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions. It is equal to the sum of the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the sub display device 44 and the predetermined number (specifically, “1”).

Since the number of dots in the frame areas 117 and 118 is set as described above, drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 and one frame for the second sub display device 44. Both the drawing data for displaying the image can be created in one frame area 117, 118.

For details of the setting mode of the first sub-image data 133 and the second sub-image data 134 in the frame areas 117 and 118, as described above, the first sub-image data 133 has a plurality of dots in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. Since the first sub-image data 133 exists, a plurality of vertical lines made up of a plurality of dots arranged in the vertical direction are arranged in the horizontal direction in the first sub-image data 133, as shown in FIG. Similarly, since the second sub-image data 134 also has a plurality of dots in each of the vertical and horizontal directions as described above, the second sub-image data 134 is arranged in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 39(b). A plurality of vertical lines composed of a plurality of dots are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 39(c), since the frame areas 117 and 118 have a plurality of dots in each of the vertical and horizontal directions as already described, the vertical line formed by the plurality of dots arranged in the vertical direction is in the horizontal direction. It will be installed in parallel.

In the configuration, the data of each vertical line of the first sub-image data 133 is set by being distributed to the vertical lines set to odd-numbered numbers in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118. In this case, the data of each vertical line in the first sub-image data 133 does not break the order of arrangement in the horizontal direction in the first sub-image data 133, and each of the odd-numbered horizontal lines in the frame regions 117 and 118. It is set to a vertical line. Further, in each of the frame regions 117 and 118, the data of each vertical line of the second sub-image data 134 is set by being dispersed to the vertical lines set to even numbers in the horizontal direction. In this case, the data of each vertical line in the second sub-image data 134 does not disturb the horizontal arrangement order in the second sub-image data 134, and the even-numbered horizontal even numbers in the frame regions 117 and 118. It is set to a vertical line.

The image signals corresponding to the data set in the odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118 are output to the corresponding dots in the first sub display device 43 by the first output unit 131 of the second display circuit 99. It Further, the image signals corresponding to the data set in the even-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118 are respectively output by the second output section 132 of the second display circuit 99 to the corresponding dots in the second sub display device 44. Is output to. As a result, the data corresponding to the image signal output to the first sub display device 43 becomes the data as shown in FIG. 39D, and the data corresponding to the image signal output to the second sub display device 44 corresponds to the data shown in FIG. The data is as shown in 39(e).

The output of the image signal to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 in the second display circuit 99 is synchronized with the clock signal input to the second display circuit 99 from the clock circuit provided in the production LSI 85. It will be done. Specifically, the second display circuit 99, for one pulse signal received as a clock signal, an image corresponding to one dot existing in the horizontal odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118. The signal is output to the first sub display device 43, and at the same time, the image signal corresponding to one dot arranged side by side in a predetermined lateral direction with respect to the one dot is output to the second sub display device 44. More specifically, regarding the drawing data created in the frame areas 117 and 118, at the output timing of the first image signal, the image signal corresponding to one dot existing in the upper left corner in the frame areas 117 and 118 in FIG. Is output to the first sub display device 43, and at the same time, an image signal corresponding to one dot juxtaposed to the right of the one dot is output to the second sub display device 44. At the output timing of the next image signal, it corresponds to the odd-numbered dots in the horizontal direction of the two dots arranged to the right with respect to the two dots for which the image signal was output at the first output timing. The image signal is output to the first sub display device 43, and the image signal corresponding to the even-numbered dots is output to the second sub display device 44. Thereafter, after the output of the image signal for one horizontal line is completed, two dots are sequentially output from the left for one horizontal line below the horizontal line by two dots.

The manner in which the image signal is output to each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 will be described with reference to the timing with which the image signal is output from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41. FIG. 40 is a time chart showing how an image signal is output to each of the display devices 41, 43 and 44. FIG. 40A shows the clock circuit of the production LSI 85 to the first display circuit 98 and the second display circuit 99. 40B shows an output mode of a clock signal output to the main display device 41, FIG. 40B shows a period during which an image signal is output from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41, and FIG. 40C shows a second display circuit 99. 40D shows the period during which the image signal is output to the first sub display device 43, and FIG. 40D shows the period during which the image signal is output from the second display circuit 99 to the second sub display device 44.

At the timing of t1, output of the pulse signal to the first display circuit 98 and the second display circuit 99 as a clock signal is started as shown in FIG. In this case, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 40B, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 is started. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 40C, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 from the first output unit 131 of the second display circuit 99 to the first sub display device 43 is started. It

After that, at a timing of t2, which is a situation in which the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 is continued, the timing is shown in FIG. Thus, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 from the first output unit 131 of the second display circuit 99 to the first sub display device 43 is completed. Then, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 40D, an image corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 from the second output section 132 of the second display circuit 99 to the second sub display device 44. The output of the signal is started.

After that, at the timing of t3, the output of the signal for one pulse in the clock signal is ended as shown in FIG. In this case, at the timing of t3, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 is completed as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 40D, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 from the second output unit 132 of the second display circuit 99 to the second sub display device 44 is completed.

After that, the same signal output as the timing of t1 to t3 is repeated at the timing of t4 to t6, the timing of t7 to t9, and the timing of t10 to t12. Then, by outputting each image signal in synchronization with the output of the pulse signal in the clock signal as described above, the main display is performed by using one drawing data created in one frame area 114, 115. While the device 41 updates the image for one frame, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are utilized by using one drawing data created in one frame area 117, 118. In each of the above, the image for one frame is updated.

When one dot in the frame areas 114 and 115 corresponds to one dot in the main display device 41, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 114 and 115 with respect to one dot in the main display device 41. This is performed in the output period of one pulse of the clock signal, and when one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 corresponds to the plurality of dots of the main display device 41, the one of the frame areas 114 and 115 corresponding to the plurality of dots of the main display device 41. The output of the image signal corresponding to one dot is performed during the output period of one pulse of the clock signal. When one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to one dot in the first sub display device 43, an image corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 for one dot in the first sub display device 43. When the signal is output in the output period of half of one pulse of the clock signal and one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to a plurality of dots in the first sub display device 43, the first sub display device 43. The output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 for the plurality of dots is performed in the output period of one half of one pulse of the clock signal. When one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to one dot in the second sub display device 44, an image corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 for one dot in the second sub display device 44. The signal output is performed in the output period of half of one pulse of the clock signal, and when one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to a plurality of dots of the second sub display device 44, the second sub display device 44. The output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 for the plurality of dots is performed in the output period of one half of one pulse of the clock signal.

As described above, the drawing data for displaying the image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 and the drawing data for displaying the image for one frame on the second sub display device 44 are one frame region. Since the drawing data corresponding to the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are created by being aggregated with respect to 117 and 118, the number of frame areas 117 and 118 can be reduced. It becomes possible to suppress.

In response to the input of one pulse of the clock signal, the image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output to the first sub-display device 43 and corresponds to another one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118. The image signal is output to the second sub display device 44. Accordingly, the timing of completing the update of the image for one frame in the first sub display device 43 and the timing of completing the update of the image for one frame in the second sub display device 44 are substantially the same timing. Is possible. Therefore, the timing of completing the update of the image for one frame of one of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is larger than the timing of completing the update of the image of one frame for the other. It is possible to prevent it from slipping.

The drawing data for displaying the image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 is set to the odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118, and the image for one frame is displayed on the second sub display device 44. Drawing data for display is set to even-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118. Accordingly, when the image signals are output from the frame areas 117 and 118 to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, the image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output to the first sub display device 43. Since it is only necessary to output to the second sub-display device 44 the image signal existing next to the one dot and to the second sub-display device 44, the processing configuration for specifying the type of the dot for which the image signal is output is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration capable of outputting the above image signal will be described. First, the writing process executed by the 2D control unit 96 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The writing process is executed in step S705 in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19).

In the writing process, the display order priority data set in the drawing list for the image data to be written this time is specified, and the value of the specified display order priority data is the first display target reference value “100”. It is determined whether or not it is less than "(step S1401). When the value of the display order priority data is less than “100” which is the first display target reference value (step S1401: YES), the image data to be written this time is the drawing data corresponding to the main display device 41. Since the image data is to be created, a process for drawing the image data to be written this time is executed in the 2D drawing area 112 in the drawing area 111 for main display of the register 93 ( Step S1402). The 2D drawing area 112 is an area for creating drawing data for a 2D image among drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the main display device 41 as described above.

On the other hand, when the value of the display order priority data is equal to or larger than the first display target reference value “100” (step S1401: NO), the image data to be written this time is in any of the sub display devices 43, Since it means that the image data is image data for creating drawing data corresponding to No. 44, drawing processing is executed in the drawing area 116 for sub display in the register 93 (step S1403). FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the drawing process.

First, the display order priority data set in the drawing list for the image data to be written this time is specified, and the value of the specified display order priority data is less than "200" which is the second display target reference value. It is determined whether there is any (step S1501). When the value of the display order priority data is less than “200” which is the second display target reference value (step S1501: YES), the image data to be written this time is the drawing data corresponding to the first sub display device 43. Means that the image data is for creating. In this case, first, the setting process for the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S1502). The drawing number counter is a counter for the 2D control unit 96 to specify how many vertical lines exist in the horizontal direction when the vertical line is set as one unit for the image data of this time. In step S1502, based on the parameter of the rotation angle set for the image data to be written this time, the orientation when the image data is drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 is specified, and the vertical line is set in that orientation. The number of is calculated. Then, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines derived by the calculation is set in the drawing number counter.

Then, the vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is extracted from the image data to be written this time (step S1503). Further, among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the coordinate parameters set for the image data to be written this time and the drawing number counter. The vertical line corresponding to the current value is specified, and the vertical line data extracted in step S1503 is drawn with respect to the specified vertical line of the frame areas 117 and 118 (step S1504). In this case, depending on the content of the coordinate parameter, even the data of the vertical line corresponding to the leftmost position in the image data to be written this time exists in the horizontal midway position of the frame regions 117 and 118. It may be drawn in a vertical line.

Then, the value of the drawing number counter is decremented by 1 (step S1505). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing number counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1506). When the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processes of steps S1503 and S1504 are executed for the data of the vertical line corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing of steps S1503 and S1504, the drawing of the image data to be written this time in the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

When the value of the display order priority data is equal to or larger than the second display target reference value “200” (step S1501: YES), the image data which is the current writing target is the drawing data corresponding to the second sub display device 44. Means that the image data is for creating. In this case, similarly to step S1502, the setting processing of the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S1507). Specifically, based on the parameter of the rotation angle set for the image data to be written this time, the direction in which the image data is drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 is specified, and in that direction, The number of vertical lines is calculated. Then, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines derived by the calculation is set in the drawing number counter.

Then, the vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the drawing counter is extracted from the image data to be written this time (step S1508). Further, among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the parameter of the coordinates set for the image data to be written this time and the drawing number counter. The vertical line corresponding to the current value is specified, and the vertical line data extracted in step S1508 is drawn with respect to the specified vertical line of the frame areas 117 and 118 (step S1509). In this case, depending on the content of the coordinate parameter, even the data of the vertical line corresponding to the leftmost position in the image data to be written this time exists in the horizontal midway position of the frame regions 117 and 118. It may be drawn in a vertical line.

Thereafter, the value of the drawing number counter is decremented by 1 (step S1510). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing number counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1511). When the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processes of steps S1508 and S1509 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing of steps S1508 and S1509, drawing of the image data to be written this time in the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

Next, the signal output processing executed by the second display circuit 99 of the production LSI 85 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Although the second display circuit 99 is provided as a dedicated circuit in which a circuit for executing the signal output process is set in advance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the programs and the programs stored in the memory module 83 and the like are not limited thereto. It may be configured as a general-purpose circuit that executes signal output processing using data. The same applies to the first display circuit 98.

When the output of the pulse signal from the clock circuit is started, the signal output timing comes (step S1601: YES). When the signal output timing comes, the abscissa update processing is executed (step S1602). In the updating process of the abscissa, if the current processing time is the output processing time of the first image signal for the drawing data which is the current output target of the image signal, the dot at the upper left corner in the frame areas 117 and 118 is the image. The coordinate information is set so that the dot is a signal output target. On the other hand, when the current processing time is not the output processing time of the first image signal, the abscissa information of the current coordinate information is updated so as to be shifted by one dot to the right dot. In this case, the ordinate information of the coordinate information is maintained as it is.

As a result of updating the abscissa information so as to shift to the right dot by one dot, if the abscissa information exceeds the maximum value of the abscissa (step S1603: YES), the abscissa information is the frame area. The information of the abscissa is cleared to "0" so that the information corresponds to the leftmost dot in 117 and 118 (step S1604). Further, the ordinate information is updated so that the ordinate information becomes the information corresponding to the dot one step below the current ordinate dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 (step S1605).

After that, the image signal set to the dot of the coordinate information obtained as the result of this update is output from the first output unit 131 to the corresponding dot of the first sub display device 43 (step S1606). The output period of this image signal is less than or equal to half the output period of the pulse signal in the clock signal. When the output of the image signal is completed (step S1607: YES), the abscissa update processing is executed (step S1608). In the updating process of the abscissa, the abscissa information of the current coordinate information is updated so as to be shifted by one dot to the right dot. In this case, the ordinate information of the coordinate information is maintained as it is. After that, the image signal set in the dot of the coordinate information of the result updated this time is output from the second output unit 132 to the corresponding dot of the second sub display device 44 (step S1609). The output period of this image signal is less than or equal to half the output period of the pulse signal in the clock signal. When the output of the image signal is completed (step S1610: YES), the current processing cycle of the signal output processing ends.

By performing the signal output processing as described above, every time one pulse signal is input as the clock signal to the second display circuit 99 as shown in the time chart of FIG. The image signal is output to the first sub display device 43 and the image signal is output to the second sub display device 44.

Here, as described above, the main display device 41 is not displaceable, while the sub display devices 43, 44 are displaceable. Specifically, the first sub display device 43 is basically arranged at the initial position as shown in FIG. 5, and in the execution period of the effect of moving the first sub display device 43, FIG. 6 and the second side-by-side position as shown in FIG. 6B, and so on. Further, the second sub display device 44 is basically arranged at the initial position as shown in FIG. 5, and during the execution period of the effect of moving the second sub display device 44, as shown in FIG. The first side-by-side position and the second side-by-side position as shown in FIG. 6B are arranged at positions for display effect.

FIG. 44 shows an example of an execution target table for display control during the displacement effect period in which the effect of displacing the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is executed. In the displacement effect period shown in FIG. 44, first, both the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are arranged in the initial positions, and the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the first sub display device 43 An image is displayed on each of the two sub display devices 44. In this case, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 display images corresponding to the initial positions.

After that, in a situation where the second sub display device 44 is held at the initial position and the first sub display device 43 is displaced or arranged at the display effect position, the main display device 41, the first sub display device Image display is performed on each of the display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. In this case, the image for display effect is displayed on the first sub display device 43, while the image corresponding to the arrangement at the initial position is displayed on the second sub display device 44.

After that, in a situation where the first sub display device 43 is arranged at the initial position and the second sub display device 44 is displaced or arranged at the position for display effect, the main display device 41, the first sub display device Image display is performed on each of the display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. In this case, the first sub-display device 43 displays the image corresponding to the arrangement at the initial position, while the second sub-display device 44 displays the display effect image.

After that, in a situation where both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are displaced or arranged at the display effect position, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the first sub-display device 43 An image is displayed on each of the two sub display devices 44. In this case, the display effect image is displayed on both the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44.

In the configuration in which the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are displaceably provided as described above, no matter which position each sub display device 43, 44 is placed in, The frame areas 117 and 118 of the sub-display drawing area 116 in the register 93 correspond to the drawing data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 by the certain processing already described at each update timing. It is created by aggregating drawing data. Further, by using the drawing data created by the integration, the image signal is output to each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 by the certain process described above. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the processing configuration for creating the drawing data and the processing configuration for outputting the image signal according to the position of each of the sub-display devices 43, 44, so that the processing configuration can be simplified. It will be possible.

<Effects of configuration relating to display output to each sub-display device 43, 44>
Drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 (hereinafter, also referred to as first drawing data) and drawing data for displaying an image for one frame on the second sub display device 44 ( (Hereinafter also referred to as the second drawing data) is created for one frame area 117, 118, so that the drawing data corresponding to each sub-display device 43, 44 is stored in a different frame area. It is possible to reduce the number of frame regions 117 and 118 as compared with the created configuration. This makes it possible to display images on the plurality of sub display devices 43 and 44 while simplifying the hardware configuration for accessing the frame areas 117 and 118.

Both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set in one frame area 117, 118 at the same time. This makes it possible to overlap the period for creating the first drawing data and the period for creating the second drawing data.

At the same update timing, both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to be used are set in one frame area 117, 118. As a result, it is not necessary to individually use the first drawing data and the second drawing data set in one frame area 117, 118 at different update timings, and thus the processing load of the second display circuit 99 is reduced. It becomes possible.

The drawing data for displaying the image for one frame on the first sub display device 43 is set to the odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118, and the image for one frame is displayed on the second sub display device 44. Drawing data for display is set to even-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118. Accordingly, when the image signals are output from the frame areas 117 and 118 to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, the image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output to the first sub display device 43. Since it is only necessary to output to the second sub-display device 44 the image signal existing next to the one dot and to the second sub-display device 44, the processing configuration for specifying the type of the dot for which the image signal is output is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

In response to the input of one pulse of the clock signal, the image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output to the first sub-display device 43 and corresponds to another one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118. The image signal is output to the second sub display device 44. Accordingly, the timing of completing the update of the image for one frame in the first sub display device 43 and the timing of completing the update of the image for one frame in the second sub display device 44 are substantially the same timing. Is possible. Therefore, the timing of completing the update of the image for one frame of one of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is larger than the timing of completing the update of the image of one frame for the other. It is possible to prevent it from slipping.

<Structure for displaying right-handed notification images 141, 143>
Next, a configuration for displaying the right-handed notification images 141, 143 on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 will be described.

As described above, in the game area PA, the special electric winning device 32 is provided in the right area when the center frame 42 is used as a reference. Therefore, in order to generate a prize in the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, it is necessary to perform a shooting operation so that the game ball flows down the right side region. In this case, in the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44, a right-handing notification image indicating that the shooting operation should be performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area of the game area PA. Is displayed.

45(a) and 45(b) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the right hitting notification images 141, 143 displayed on the respective display devices 41, 43, 44. As shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b), in the main display device 41, as the right-side hitting notification image 141 on the main side, it extends in the horizontal direction at a midway position in the vertical direction on the display surface of the main display device 41. Then, the strip image 141a is displayed, and the instruction image 141b for instructing the right striking is displayed so as to overlap the strip image 141a from the front. The right-handed notification image 141 on the main side is continuously displayed in the open/close execution mode, and the display position and display mode on the main display device 41 are constant. As shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 46A, the main side right hitting notification image 141 is displayed using the main side right hitting image data group 142 stored in advance in the memory module 83.

In the opening/closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 45(a), the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 may be arranged at the first juxtaposed position, and as shown in FIG. 45(b). In some cases, the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 may be arranged in the second juxtaposed position. When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first juxtaposed position or the second juxtaposed position, the main display device 41 is used for a part of the area in which the main-side right-handing notification image 141 is displayed. The sub display devices 43 and 44 face each other from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the visibility of the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side is deteriorated by the sub display devices 43 and 44. On the other hand, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at a position other than the initial position such as the first juxtaposed position or the second juxtaposed position, the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 43 On each of the sub display devices 44, the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed. In the opening/closing execution mode, when the first sub-display device 43 is arranged at the initial position, the right-side notification image 143 on the sub side is not displayed on the first sub-display device 43, and the opening/closing execution is performed. In the mode, when the second sub display device 44 is arranged at the initial position, the right side notification image 143 on the sub side is not displayed on the second sub display device 44.

One sub-right hitting notification image 143 is displayed on a part of the display surface of the first sub display device 43 and one on the display surface of the second sub display device 44. In the memory module 83, as shown in FIG. 46A, sub-side right-handed image data 144 is stored in advance, and when the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43, The sub-side right-handed image data 144 is used in any case where the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is displayed on the second sub-display device 44.

The position where the sub-side right-handling notification image 143 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43 is the upper-right corner portion in the state of FIG. 45A, and the sub-side right-handling notification image on the first sub-display device 43 is displayed. The display position of the image 143 is fixed at the same position even if the first sub display device 43 is displaced. That is, although the upper right corner portion of the first sub display device 43 in the state of FIG. 45A becomes the lower right corner portion of the state of FIG. Since the display position of the right-handed notification image 143 on the side is fixed, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed in the upper right corner portion of the first sub display device 43 in the state of FIG. At the same time, in the state of FIG. 45(b), it is displayed in the lower right corner portion of the first sub display device 43.

Similarly, the position on the second sub display device 44 where the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed is the lower left corner portion in the state of FIG. 45A, and the position on the sub side of the second sub display device 44 is The display position of the right-handed notification image 143 is fixed at the same position even if the second sub display device 44 is displaced. That is, the lower left corner portion of the second sub display device 44 in the state of FIG. 45A becomes the upper left corner portion in the state of FIG. 45B, but the sub side of the first sub display device 43. Since the display position of the right-handed notification image 143 is fixed, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed in the lower left corner portion of the second sub display device 44 in the state of FIG. In the state of FIG. 45(b), it is displayed in the upper left corner portion of the second sub display device 44.

By fixing the display position of the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 as described above, the display position of the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 on the sub display devices 43 and 44 is determined. There is no need to switch the information of the coordinates to be attached according to the displacement state of the sub display devices 43 and 44. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for displaying the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side.

When the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first juxtaposed position where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are juxtaposed vertically, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged on the upper side as shown in FIG. The sub-right hitting notification image 143 is displayed on the upper part of the first sub display device 43, and the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 is displayed on the lower part of the second sub display device 44 arranged on the lower side. Is displayed. When the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the second juxtaposed position where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are juxtaposed to the left and right, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged on the left side as shown in FIG. 45(b). The sub-side right hitting notification image 143 is displayed on the upper part of the second sub display device 44 and the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 is displayed on the lower part of the first sub display device 43 arranged on the right side. Is displayed. That is, regardless of whether the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged side by side, regardless of whether they are arranged in the first side-by-side position or the second side-by-side position, The right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed at each position. This makes it possible to enhance the visibility of the right-side hitting notification image 143 on the sub side, regardless of whether it is arranged at the first side-by-side position or the second side-by-side position.

In the opening/closing execution mode, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are drive-controlled so that the state of being placed in the first juxtaposed position and the state of being placed in the second juxtaposed position are alternately repeated. As a result, the situation in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are united in the clockwise direction and the situation in which they rotate in the counterclockwise direction are alternately repeated. On the other hand, in the sub-right-handing notification image 143, the player can easily understand the content of the right-handing instruction regardless of the rotation position of each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. It is an image.

46(b) and 46(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents displayed as the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side. As shown in FIGS. 46(b) and 46(c), the right-hand hitting notification image 143 on the sub side has an annular outer edge, and the continuous instruction image 143a is displayed in the annular width portion. .. The continuous instruction image 143a is composed of two character images of “right hitting” and two arrow images. The arrow images exist on both sides of the character image and the character images exist on both sides of the arrow image. They are arranged in a ring. In this case, one character image and one character image are arranged so as to face each other with the center of the annular shape interposed therebetween, and the upper side of each character image is the outer peripheral side. As a result, even when the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is arranged at the rotation position such that one character image faces downward, the other character image is displayed face-up. Therefore, the player can easily understand the content of the character image regardless of the rotation position of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side.

Further, the sub-side right-handing notification image 143 has a fixed display position on each of the sub-display devices 43, 44, and a fixed direction (specifically, with the annular center portion of the sub-side right-handing notification image 143 as the center of rotation. Is displayed to rotate rightward and clockwise). As a result, regardless of the position where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged, the right hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is surely generated at the rotation position where the player can easily understand the content of the character image. Will be done.

In the configuration in which the sub-right hitting notification image 143 is displayed so as to rotate in a fixed direction, the rotation speed is changed according to the displacement state of the sub display devices 43 and 44. The manner in which the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is changed according to the displacement state of the sub display devices 43 and 44 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 47. FIG. 47A shows a period during which the right-handed notification is executed on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44, and FIG. 47B shows the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side on the main display device 41. 47C shows a period, FIG. 47C shows a period in which the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44, and FIG. 47D shows the sub display devices 43 and 44 in a clockwise direction or Indicates the period of rotation in the counterclockwise direction.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 47(a), it is the timing at which the right-handed notification should be started. In this case, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 47(b), the main display device 41 starts to display the right-hand side hitting notification image 141, and as shown in FIG. The display device 43, 44 starts displaying the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side.

Here, the sub-right-handed notification image 143 is displayed so as to rotate in the clockwise direction as described above, and the rotation speed thereof is the first speed and the second speed higher than the first speed. There is a third speed that is faster than the second speed. The first speed having the lowest speed is the speed set when the integrated body of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the second speed, which is an intermediate speed, is the sub-display devices 43 and 44. Is the speed that is set when the integrated body of FIG. 4 is not rotated, and the third speed, which is the highest speed, is the speed that is set when the integrated body of each sub-display device 43, 44 rotates in the counterclockwise direction. Is.

When the integral of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the clockwise direction, the rotation speed in the clockwise direction of the right hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is set to the lowest first speed. When the integrated body of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the same direction as the rotation direction of the right-handed notification image 143, the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side can be made relatively low. .. This makes it possible to prevent the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side from rotating faster than necessary.

When the sub display devices 43, 44 are rotated in the counterclockwise direction by setting the third rotation speed in the clockwise rotation direction of the right hitting notification image 143 on the sub side to the highest value, the sub side is set. When the integrated body of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the right-handed notification image 143, the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side can be relatively increased. Becomes Further, the rotation speed of the sub-right-handed notification image 143 is higher than the rotation speed when the integrated body of the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotates in the opposite direction. As a result, even if the sub-display devices 43, 44 are rotated in the opposite direction, the situation in which the player recognizes that the sub-right hitting notification image 143 is rotating clockwise is maintained. It is possible to

At the timing of t1, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are not rotating as shown in FIG. 47(d). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotation speed of the sub-right hitting notification image 143 is set to the second speed.

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the integrated body of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 starts to rotate in the clockwise direction. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotation speed of the sub-right hitting notification image 143 is changed from the second speed to the first speed. This makes it possible to reduce the rotation speed of the right-hand hitting notification image 143 on the sub side as the integrated body of the sub display devices 43 and 44 starts rotating in the clockwise direction.

Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the rotation of the integrated body of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is stopped as shown in FIG. 47(d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotation speed of the sub impact rightward notification image 143 returns from the first speed to the second speed.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the integrated body of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotation speed of the sub-right hitting notification image 143 is changed from the second speed to the third speed. This makes it possible to accelerate the rotation speed of the right-side hitting notification image 143 on the sub side as the integrated body of the sub display devices 43 and 44 starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction.

Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the rotation of the integrated body of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is stopped as shown in FIG. 47(d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotation speed of the sub impact rightward notification image 143 returns from the first speed to the second speed.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(b), the display of the main-side right-handed notification image 141 on the main display device 41 is terminated, and as shown in FIG. The display of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is ended.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling the sub-right-handed notification image 143 to be displayed as described above will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the right-hand hitting notification executed by the effect CPU 82. The setting process for right-handed notification is executed by the display control task process of step S506 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

When it is the right-timing notification start timing (step S1701: NO, step S1702: YES), the process for starting the display of the right-hand notification image 141 on the main side is executed (step S1703). In the process, the main-side right-handed image data group 142 is started so that the main-side right-handed notification image 141 as shown in FIGS. 45A and 45B is started to be displayed on the main display device 41. Is set as a target of the drawing processing, and parameter information to be applied this time to the right-hand side image data group 142 on the main side is derived.

After that, the process for setting the coordinate information of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is executed (step S1704). In the process, the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 is displayed in a predetermined corner portion of the first sub display device 43, and the sub-side right-hand notification image 143 is displayed in a predetermined corner portion of the second sub display device 44. Two pieces of fixed coordinate information corresponding to each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are derived so that the right-handed notification image 143 is displayed. Further, in the processing, in order to display the sub-side right-handling notification image 143 on the first sub-display device 43, a usage instruction is set for one sub-side right-handing image data 144, and the second sub-display is performed. In order to display the sub-side right-handing notification image 143 on the device 44, a usage instruction is set for one sub-side right-handing image data 144. In step S1705, parameter information other than the coordinate information applied to the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub display device 43 is derived and used for the second sub display device 44. Parameter information other than the coordinate information applied to the right-handed image data 144 on the sub side is derived.

The drawing data is created in accordance with the drawing list in which the information derived in steps S1703 to S1705 is set, and the image signal is output in accordance with the drawing data. While the display of the image 141 is started, the display of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is started on each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44.

If it is the right-handing notification execution period (step S1701: YES), the main-side right-handing notification image 141 is updated (step S1706). In the process, the parameter information for displaying the right-hand hitting notification image 141 on the main side in the form of the update timing corresponding to the update instruction this time is derived. By displaying the image in accordance with the drawing list in which the parameter information is set, the display content of the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side in the main display device 41 is updated.

After that, similarly to step S1704, a process for setting coordinate information on the sub-right-handed notification image 143 is executed (step S1707). In the process, the same coordinate information derived in step S1704 is used for the sub-side right-handed image data 144 and the second sub display device 44 used for the first sub display device 43. The right-handed image data 144 on the sub side is derived. As a result, the display position of the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 on the first sub display device 43 is fixed, and the display position of the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 on the second sub display device 44 is fixed.

After that, when it is not the rotation period of the integrated body of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 (step S1708: NO), the rotation speed of the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 displayed on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is the second speed. The sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub-display device 43 and the sub-side right-handed image used for the second sub-display device 44 are used as rotation information for It is derived as rotation information applied to each of the data 144 (step S1709). By displaying the image according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, the sub-right-side hitting notification image 143 appears to rotate at the second rotation speed in each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. Displayed in.

When the sub display devices 43 and 44 are in the rotation period and the rotation direction is the clockwise direction (step S1708 and step S1709: YES), the first rotation information updating process is performed (step S1708). S1711). In the first update process, the rotation information for making the rotation speed of the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 displayed on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 become the first speed is stored in the first sub display device 43. Is derived as rotation information to be applied to each of the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for and the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub-display device 44. The images are displayed according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, so that the sub-right-side right-handing notification image 143 is rotated at the rotation speed of the first speed in each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. Is displayed in.

When the sub display devices 43 and 44 are in the rotation period of the one body and the rotation direction is the counterclockwise direction (step S1708: YES, step S1710: NO), the second update process of the rotation information at the time of rotation is executed. Yes (step S1712). In the second update process, the rotation information for making the rotation speed of the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 displayed on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 become the third speed is displayed on the first sub display device 43. Is derived as rotation information to be applied to each of the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for and the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub-display device 44. The images are displayed in accordance with the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, so that the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 is rotated at the rotation speed of the third speed in each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Displayed in.

When any one of step S1709, step S1711, and step S1712 is executed, other parameter setting processing is executed (step S1713). In the process, the parameter information other than the coordinate information and the rotation information applied to the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub display device 43 is derived, and the second sub display device 44 is processed. Parameter information other than coordinate information and rotation information applied to the sub-side right-handed image data 144 to be used is derived.

<Effect of configuration for displaying right-handed notification images 141, 143>
The rotation operation is performed in the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest of the game. In this case, in the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side, the continuous instruction image 143a is annularly arranged. This allows the player to recognize the content of the continuous instruction image 143a for notification even when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

On the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the right-side hitting notification image 143 on the sub-side is displayed as if it is rotating. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the sub-right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side in the predetermined display orientation regardless of the rotational positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44.

Since the rotation speed of the right-hand hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is changed according to the operation mode of the rotation operation in the sub display devices 43 and 44, whichever mode is the operation mode of the rotation operation in the sub display devices 43 and 44. Even in this case, it is possible to make the display content of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side easy for the player to recognize.

<Structure for displaying rotation period image 153>
Next, a configuration for displaying the rotation period image 153 on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 will be described.

The sub-display devices 43 and 44 are displaceably provided as described above, and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged side by side in the first juxtaposed position and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are laterally arranged. Is rotatable with respect to a second side-by-side position which is arranged side by side. In this case, when the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate from the first juxtaposed position to the second juxtaposed position, in each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44. The rotation period image 153 is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the integrated body of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is rotating.

FIGS. 49(a) to 49(e) are explanatory views for explaining the content of the effect using the rotation period image 153. When both the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are arranged at the initial position, the movement start timing to the juxtaposed position becomes As shown, the movement of each sub-display device 43, 44 toward the first juxtaposed position is started. During this movement period, images that have continuity with the main display device 41 are not displayed on the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, respectively, and the main display device 41 and the first sub display device are not displayed. The moving period image 151 corresponding to each of 43 and the second sub display device 44 is displayed. In this way, the moving period image 151 corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 is individually displayed, so that the sub display devices 43 and 44 move from the initial position toward the first juxtaposed position. The player can clearly understand what is being done. The drive control for displacing the sub-display devices 43, 44 is executed by the distribution-side MPU 73 as already described.

Thereafter, the sub-display devices 43, 44 are arranged in the first juxtaposed position at the same time, so that the sub-display devices 43, 44 are vertically arranged as shown in FIG. 49(b). Thus, a series of display surfaces is formed. The state in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the first juxtaposed position is maintained for the juxtaposed display period. During this side-by-side display period, the side-by-side period image 152 such as a predetermined character image is displayed on the series of display surfaces formed by the sub-display devices 43 and 44. The juxtaposed period image 152 is displayed on both the sub display devices 43 and 44 so as to cross the boundary between the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. In the area of the main display device 41 which does not face the sub display devices 43 and 44, the parallel period image 152 different from the parallel period image 152 displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 is displayed. To be done.

After that, when the juxtaposed display period elapses, the unitary objects of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate clockwise while maintaining the state of forming a series of display surfaces, and the unitary objects are simultaneously arranged in the second juxtaposed state. Placed in position. During this rotation period, the rotation period image 153 is displayed on each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44, as shown in FIGS. 49(c) and 49(d). It The rotation period image 153 is displayed across both the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43 so as to straddle the boundary between the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43. It is displayed across both the main display device 41 and the second sub display device 44 so as to cross the boundary between the display device 41 and the second sub display device 44. The rotation period image 153 is displayed on both the sub display devices 43 and 44 so as to cross the boundary between the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. The display mode of the rotation period image 153 displayed on each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 is the same as the rotation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 as a unit. The display mode is irrelevant to the position. Specifically, the outer edge portion of the integrated body of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, which causes a boundary with the predetermined area of the main display device 41, changes with the rotation of the integrated body. The display content of the image portion displayed on both the predetermined area and the sub display devices 43 and 44 at the timing is displayed on both the predetermined area and the sub display devices 43 and 44 at the timing before the rotation period. The rotation period image 153 is displayed so that the display content has continuity with the image portion that has been displayed for the entire period. As a result, one display surface is formed by the areas of the main display device 41 not facing the sub display devices 43, 44 and the display surfaces of the sub display devices 43, 44, and the one display surface is fixed. The rotation period image 153 which is recognized by the player as the open surface is displayed on the one display surface. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the integrated body of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is rotating.

After that, when the rotation period elapses, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 become a separation period in which they are separated in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 49(e). During the separation period, an image having continuity with the main display device 41 is not displayed on each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, and the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43 are not displayed. And the separation period image 154 corresponding to each of the second sub display devices 44 are displayed. In this way, the separation period image 154 corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 is individually displayed, so that the sub display devices 43 and 44 move from the second juxtaposed position toward the separation position. It is possible to let the player know that he is moving.

Here, as described above, in the rotation period, the rotation period image 153 that makes it difficult for the player to grasp that the integrated body of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is rotating is displayed in each display device 41. , 43, 44 respectively. Then, the player recognizes that the integrated object is arranged in the first juxtaposed position although the integrated object of each sub-display device 43, 44 is actually arranged in the second juxtaposed position. The situation may occur. When the sub-display devices 43 and 44 start moving toward the separated position in such a situation, the player is likely to be surprised at the operation. Then, by giving such an unexpectedness, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the image display.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for performing the above-described image display in each of the moving period, the juxtaposed display period, the rotation period, and the separation period will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the rotation movement display setting process executed by the effect CPU 82. The rotational movement display setting process is executed by the display control task process of step S506 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

If it is a moving period to the juxtaposed position (step S1801: YES), use setting of various image data for displaying the moving period image 151 on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 is performed, and at the same time, the various settings are performed. Various parameter information applied to the image data is derived (steps S1802 to S1804). The drawing data is created according to the drawing list in which the information derived here is set, and the image signal is output according to the drawing data, so that the moving period image 151 is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. To be done.

When it is during the side-by-side display period (step S1805: YES), the use setting of various image data for displaying the side-by-side display period image 152 on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 is performed, and the various images are also set. Various parameter information applied to the data is derived (steps S1806 to S1808). The drawing data is created in accordance with the drawing list in which the information derived here is set, and the image signal is output in accordance with the drawing data, so that the display devices 41, 43, 44 display the parallel display period image 152. Is displayed.

If it is the rotation period (step S1809: YES), one display surface (hereinafter referred to as a display surface formed by the area of the main display device 41 not facing the sub display devices 43, 44 and the display surface of each sub display device 43, 44) , Also referred to as an aggregated display surface), while setting the use of various image data for displaying the rotation period image 153, and deriving various parameter information applied to these various image data (steps S1810 to S1810). S1812). The drawing data is created according to the drawing list in which the information derived here is set, and the image signal is output according to the drawing data, so that the rotation period image 153 is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. To be done.

Here, a method of creating the image data 156 to 158 for displaying the rotation period image 153 at the stage of designing the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 51. In the case of creating the image data 156 to 158, first, a plurality of 2D image data 155 for displaying a moving image over the entire aggregated display surface in the rotation period is created. The plurality of 2D image data 155 is created in a one-to-one correspondence with each update timing included in the rotation period. Then, from each of the 2D image data 155, image data 156 corresponding to each of the display range by the main display device 41, the display range by the first sub display device 43, and the display range by the second sub display device 44 at the corresponding update timing. Cut out ~158.

Explaining the contents of the image data 156 to 158 for displaying the rotation period image 153 shown in FIG. 49C, the 2D image data 155 for displaying the rotation period image 153 shown in FIG. 49C will be described. First, it is created (see FIG. 51A). When the data range corresponding to the display range of the main display device 41 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, the portions displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 become blank data as shown in FIG. 51(b). Image data 156 for displaying the rotation period image 153 is obtained for the portion. Data for setting blank color information such as black is set in the blank data. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the 2D image data 155 may be used as it is as the image data 156 for the main display device 41. In this case, even if a failure occurs in the drive mechanism of the sub display devices 43 and 44 and at least one of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is not arranged in the juxtaposed position, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are The image that should be originally displayed is displayed on the main display device 41.

When the data range corresponding to the display range of the first sub display device 43 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, an image for displaying the rotation period image 153 on the first sub display device 43 as shown in FIG. 51C. Data 157 is obtained. Further, when the data range corresponding to the display range of the second sub display device 44 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the second sub display device 44 as shown in FIG. 51D. Image data 158 is obtained.

After cutting out the various image data 156 to 158 as described above, the various image data 156 to 158 are changed to a data format corresponding to the display device 41, 43, 44 to be used. Specifically, the resolution of the main display device 41 is 800×600, whereas the resolution of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is 572×180. Therefore, the image data 156 corresponding to the main display device 41 is adjusted to the number of pixels corresponding to the resolution of the main display device 41, and the image data 157 and 158 corresponding to the sub display devices 43 and 44 are adjusted to the sub display device 43. , 44 to the number of pixels corresponding to the resolution.

Furthermore, the rotation period image 153 is displayed as a 3D image on the main display device 41, whereas the rotation period image 153 is displayed as a 2D image on the sub display devices 43 and 44. In this case, when the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the main display device 41, the image data 156 is used as texture data attached to the plate polygon. On the other hand, when the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44, the image data 157 and 158 are used as sprite data. Therefore, adjustments are made to correspond to these data formats.

The image data 156 to 158 corresponding to the display devices 41, 43, and 44 as described above are created at each update timing in the rotation period. Therefore, as the image data for displaying the rotation period image 153 in the memory module 83, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. 51E, the first image data group 161, the first sub data group 161 for the main display device 41, A second image data group 162 for the display device 43 and a third image data group 163 for the second sub display device 44 are stored. Each of the first to third image data groups 161 to 163 includes a number of image data corresponding to the number of update timings included in the rotation period. The rendering LSI 85 reads out the image data corresponding to each update timing from the first to third image data groups 161 to 163 in the rotation period and uses it.

Returning to the description of the setting process of the rotational movement display (FIG. 50 ), in the case of the separation period (step S1813: YES), various images for displaying the separation period image 154 on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44. While setting the use of data, various parameter information to be applied to these various image data is derived (steps S1814 to S1816). The drawing data is created according to the drawing list in which the information derived here is set, and the image signal is output according to the drawing data, so that the display device 41, 43, 44 displays the separation period image 154. To be done.

<Effect of Configuration for Displaying Rotation Period Image 153>
During the rotation period during which the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the rotation period image 153 is displayed to make it difficult for the player to identify that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating. It is displayed on the display devices 43 and 44. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating without the player's knowledge, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The rotation period image 153 is an image having no directivity in the direction along the display surfaces of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Accordingly, in the situation where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating by displaying the rotation period image 153 on the sub display devices 43 and 44. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify.

The rotation period image 153 is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being displayed on the non-rotating display surface without following the rotation operation of the sub display devices 43 and 44. This makes it difficult for the player to identify that the sub-display devices 43, 44 are rotating.

When the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, a part of the display surface of the main display device 41 exists around the display surface of the sub display devices 43 and 44, and a part of the display surface. In the area of, the image corresponding to the rotation period image 153 on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to display an image related to the rotation period image 153 displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 around the sub display devices 43 and 44 that are performing the rotation operation. The display device 41 and the sub-display devices 43 and 44 can perform integrated display effects.

In particular, when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the display surface of the main display device 41 exists over the entire periphery of the display surface of the sub display devices 43 and 44. This makes it possible for the player to illusion that the display surfaces of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are part of the display surface of the main display device 41, and the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate. It becomes easy to display an image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the player is present.

An image having continuity is displayed on these display devices 41, 43, 44 so as to cross the boundary between the display surface of the main display device 41 and the display surfaces of the sub display devices 43, 44. This makes it difficult for a player who pays attention to those images to recognize that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

The rotation positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 differ between the timing when the rotation period starts and the timing when the rotation period ends. In this case, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 perform the rotating operation in the situation where the rotation period image 153 is displayed, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating. The rotation positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are different. As a result, the player is expected to recognize that the rotational positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 have been changed without noticing, and it is possible to give the player a surprise.

Before and after the rotation period, an image that allows the player to easily recognize the rotation positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44. During the rotation period, the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate. It is difficult for the player to recognize that the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44. This makes it possible to strongly give the player the impression that the rotational positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 have been changed without noticing it.

<Structure for displaying the abnormality notification image 176>
Next, a configuration for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10, there are a plurality of types of events for which abnormality notification is executed. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an event that is a target of execution of abnormality notification. As events to be executed for the abnormality notification, as shown in FIG. 52, magnet detection, radio wave detection, special winning opening abnormality detection, disconnection abnormality, game ball discharge abnormality, movable body abnormality, and full tank abnormality. , Vibration detection, door opening, and frame opening exist. The magnet detection is an event in which a magnetic force detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10 detects a magnetic force. Radio wave detection is an event in which a radio wave detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10 detects a radio wave. The special winning opening abnormality detection is an event in which the entry of a game ball into the special electric winning device 32 is detected in a situation other than the open/close execution mode. The disconnection abnormality means that the main side MPU 62 receives a connection confirmation signal from the prize winning detection sensors provided in the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the through gate 35. It is an event that has not occurred. The game ball discharge abnormality is an event in which the discharge of the game ball from the payout device 68 is not detected even though the payout device 68 is drive-controlled to pay out the game ball. The abnormality of the movable body is an event in which the general utility object 34a is not opened even though the general utility object 34a of the second operation port 34 is drive-controlled to be in the open state. The full tank abnormality is an event in which the lower plate 56a is full of game balls. Vibration detection is an event in which vibration is detected by a vibration detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10. Door opening is an event in which the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state. The frame opening is an event in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

When such an event occurs, the display light emitting unit 53 emits light for anomaly notification and the speaker unit 54 outputs an anomaly notification sound. Further, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, 44. In the abnormality notification image 176, an image corresponding to the type of event that triggered the execution of the abnormality notification is displayed, and specifically, characters indicating the type of the event are displayed. In this case, as described above, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are provided so as to be displaceable, and as the sub display devices 43 and 44 are displaced, the main display device 41 becomes visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The range changes. Along with this, the display mode of the abnormality notification image 176 differs depending on the position where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged.

FIGS. 53A to 53E are explanatory views for explaining the display mode of the abnormality notification image 176. In a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are both arranged at the initial position, the display surface of the main display device 41 is located above and below the sub-display devices 43 and 44 as shown in FIG. Except for a part of the area, most of the area is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial position, the display range 171 at the time of non-operation excluding the upper and lower partial regions facing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is notified of the abnormality. This is the display range of the image 176.

The display range 171 during non-operation is set to a size that allows seven abnormal notification images 176 displayed in a predetermined size to be displayed simultaneously. On the other hand, as described above, there are eight or more events for which the abnormality notification is executed. In this case, if eight or more events that are the targets of the abnormality notification occur at the same time, the abnormality notification image 176 cannot be displayed for some of the events. Therefore, the priority is set for the event for which the abnormality notification is executed as shown in FIG. 52, and the event for which the abnormality notification is executed is selected according to the priority.

The priority is set to the highest level in the first event group corresponding to the misconduct that may cause a great disadvantage to the game hall. The first event group includes magnet detection, radio wave detection, and special winning opening abnormality detection. Next, the priority of the second event group, which may prevent the game from proceeding normally, is set high. The second event group includes disconnection abnormality, game ball discharge abnormality, movable body abnormality, and full tank abnormality. Then, the priority of the third event group that can occur during maintenance or the like is set to the lowest even when the game is being played normally. The third event group includes vibration detection, door opening and frame opening.

Since the display range 171 during non-operation is set to a size capable of displaying seven abnormality notification images 176 at the same time as already described, all the events included in the first event group and the second event group are included. Even if all the events included in the event occur simultaneously, it is possible to simultaneously display the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of the events. On the other hand, if not only all the events included in the first event group and all the events included in the second event group but also the events included in the third event group occur at the same time, it is included in the third event group. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the displayed event is not displayed. In this case, even if the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group is displayed first, all the events included in the first event group and all the events included in the second event group are thereafter displayed. When the above event occurs at the same time, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group that has been executed until then is interrupted, and the abnormality notification corresponding to the event on the higher priority side is interrupted. The display of the image 176 is started. As a result, it becomes possible to prioritize the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event on the higher priority side.

Further, after that, in a situation where the events included in the third event group continue, at least one of the events on the higher priority side is resolved and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event is terminated. The display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group is started. As a result, when there is a margin in the display area of the abnormality notification image 176, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event occurring at that time can be displayed.

If the predetermined event occurs again in a situation where the state in which the predetermined event has occurred has not been resolved and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the predetermined event is being displayed, the abnormality notification that has already been performed is reported. Only the display of the image 176 is continued, and a plurality of abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to the same event are not displayed. Further, when the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the display range 171 when not operating, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed so as to overwrite a part of the effect image.

Next, a case where an effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 is executed will be described. When the effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 is executed, each sub display device 43 and 44 has an area between the initial position and the first juxtaposed position (see FIG. 53(b)), a first juxtaposition. A region to be the installation position (see FIG. 53(c)), a region between the first juxtaposition position and the second juxtaposition position, a region to be the second juxtaposition position (see FIG. 53(d)), a second It is arranged in a region between the juxtaposed position and the separation position and a region serving as the separation position (see FIG. 53(e)). In this case, if the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in a region of the main display device 41 that may face the sub display devices 43 and 44, the abnormality notification image 176 may be hidden by the sub display devices 43 and 44. On the other hand, if the area in which the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41 is to be finely switched in accordance with the positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the processing configuration for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 becomes complicated. I will end up. Therefore, a plurality of display ranges 172 to 174 of the main display device 41 that do not always face the sub display devices 43 and 44 during the execution period of the effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 become the display range of the abnormality notification image 176. Specifically, the first display range 172 during operation set in the upper left corner of the main display device 41 and the second display range 172 during operation set in the upper right corner of the main display device 41. 173 and a third display range 174 during operation set in the lower right corner portion of the main display device 41 are set.

Each of the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation is set to have a size capable of displaying only one abnormality notification image 176 displayed in a predetermined size. That is, during the period in which the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is executed, the number of abnormality notification images 176 that can be displayed simultaneously is three. On the other hand, as described above, there are eight or more events for which the abnormality notification is executed. Therefore, even in this case, the event to be displayed in the abnormality notification image 176 is selected according to the priority already described, and the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed for the selected event. For example, if there are four or more events that are the targets of the abnormality notification, then three of the events with high priority are selected, and the abnormality notification corresponding to the selected three events is performed. The image 176 is displayed. Then, when any event that is the display target of the abnormality notification image 176 is resolved and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 for that event is ended, it is not the display target of the abnormality notification image 176. The display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event with the lower priority is started.

Here, as described above, the number of events included in the first event group is three. This number is less than or equal to the number of the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation, that is, the number of abnormality notification images 176 that can be displayed in the period in which the effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 is executed. There is. Accordingly, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the first event group having the highest priority can be immediately displayed regardless of the timing of the occurrence of the event.

If the predetermined event occurs again in a situation where the state in which the predetermined event has occurred has not been resolved and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the predetermined event is being displayed, the abnormality notification that has already been performed is reported. Only the display of the image 176 is continued, and a plurality of abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to the same event are not displayed. Further, in the area other than the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation of the main display device 41, the effect image is displayed.

54(a) to 54(d) are explanatory views for explaining a display mode of the abnormality notification image 176 in a period in which an effect of displacing the sub display devices 43, 44 is executed. As shown in FIG. 54A, when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first juxtaposed position and the first abnormality, which is one of the above events, occurs, FIG. ), an abnormality notification image 176 indicating that the first abnormality has occurred in the first display range 172 during operation of the main display device 41 is displayed. In addition, the character image of “abnormality occurrence” is displayed as the common notification image 175 indicating that an abnormality has occurred also on the first sub-display device 43. In this case, for example, by confirming that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43, it is possible to know that some event has occurred, and further, the first display range during operation. By confirming 172, it is possible to grasp the type of event for which the abnormality notification is executed. The common notification image 175 is displayed by overwriting a part of the effect image on the sub display devices 43 and 44.

Further, the types and positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 on which the common notification image 175 is displayed differ depending on the displacement states of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Specifically, the area where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are between the initial position and the first juxtaposed position (see FIG. 53(b)) and the first juxtaposed position (see FIG. 53(c)). , Or in the region between the first side-by-side position and the second side-by-side position, the end of the first sub-display device 43 on the side opposite to the boundary side with the second sub-display device 44. The common notification image 175 is displayed at a position closer to the group. In addition, a region where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are in the second juxtaposed position (see FIG. 53D), a region between the second juxtaposed position and the separation position, or a region which is the separation position (see FIG. 53(e)), the common notification image 175 is displayed at a position near the upper end of the second sub display device 44.

After that, when the second abnormality, which is one of the above-mentioned events and is different from the first abnormality, occurs in the situation where the first abnormality is not eliminated, the main display is displayed as shown in FIG. 54(c). An abnormality notification image 176 indicating that the second abnormality has occurred in the second display range 173 when the device 41 is operating is displayed. Even in this situation, the common notification image 175 “abnormality occurred” continues to be displayed on the first sub display device 43. In this case, for example, by confirming that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43, it is possible to know that some event has occurred, and further, the first display range during operation. By checking 172 and the second display range 173 at the time of operation, it is possible to grasp the type of the event for which the abnormality notification is executed.

After that, in the case where both the first abnormality and the second abnormality have not been eliminated, a third abnormality, which is one of the above-mentioned events and is different from the first abnormality and the second abnormality, occurs, As shown in 54(d), an abnormality notification image 176 indicating that the third abnormality has occurred in the third display range 174 during operation of the main display device 41 is displayed. Even in this situation, the common notification image 175 “abnormality occurred” continues to be displayed on the first sub display device 43. In this case, for example, by confirming that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43, it is possible to know that some event has occurred, and further, the first display range during operation. By confirming 172, the second display range 173 during operation, and the third display range 174 during operation, it is possible to grasp the type of event for which the abnormality notification is executed.

In the situation shown in FIG. 54D, for example, when the event of the first abnormality is resolved, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the first abnormality in the first display range 172 during operation is terminated. Even in this case, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the second abnormality in the second display range 173 during operation and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the third abnormality in the third display range 174 during operation are displayed. The display will continue. As described above, even if the display of the abnormality notification image 176 is ended in the first display range 172 in the operation in which the display start order of the abnormality notification image 176 is the first side, the abnormality is displayed in the first display range 172 side in the operation. Instead of shifting the display target area of the notification image 176, continue displaying the abnormality notification image 176 in the second display range 173 during operation and the third display range 174 during operation that are already displayed. Then, it becomes possible to facilitate the confirmation work of whether or not the predetermined event continues.

Further, in this way, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the second display range 173 during operation and the third display range 174 during operation, and the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the first display range 172 during operation. If a new event occurs in a situation where the new event has not occurred, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the new event is displayed in the first display range 172 during operation. Even in this case, the abnormality notification image 176 which is continuously displayed is continuously displayed in the display range 172 to 174 which has been displayed until then. Therefore, it becomes possible to facilitate the work of confirming whether or not the predetermined event continues.

Further, in the situation shown in FIG. 54D, when an event different from the first abnormal event, the second abnormal event, and the third abnormal event occurs, the priority of the newly generated event is 1 to 1. If it is higher than the priority of any of the events of the third abnormality, the display range 172 to which the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event of the lowest priority among the events of the first to third abnormality is displayed. At 174, the already displayed abnormality notification image 176 is erased, and display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the newly generated event is started. Even in this case, the abnormality notification image 176 which is continuously displayed is continuously displayed in the display range 172 to 174 which has been displayed until then. Therefore, it becomes possible to facilitate the work of confirming whether or not the predetermined event continues.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling the above-described abnormality notification image 176 to be displayed will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the corresponding process of the notification command executed by the effect CPU 82. The notification command handling process is executed by the command handling process of step S503 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

When the notification start command is received from the distribution-side MPU 73 in the notification command handling process (step S1901: YES), the notification type data corresponding to the notification start command is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S1902). ). The main MPU 62 executes a management process for determining whether or not an event that is the target of the abnormality notification has occurred. The main MPU 62 transmits an abnormality occurrence command including information on the type of the event to the distribution MPU 73 when an event for which the abnormality notification is executed occurs. When the distribution-side MPU 73 receives the abnormality occurrence command, the distribution-side MPU 73 transmits a notification start command including information on the type of the event that triggered the transmission of the abnormality occurrence command to the effect CPU 82. By receiving the notification start command, the effect CPU 82 stores the notification type data in the register of the effect CPU 82 as described above. When a plurality of events occur simultaneously in the same period, the notification type data corresponding to each of the plurality of events is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82. When a notification start command corresponding to an event of the same type as the event corresponding to the notification type data already stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is received, new notification type data corresponding to the event is newly generated. Do not remember.

If even one notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the abnormality notification process is executed in the light emission control task process (step S504) in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14). As a result, if at least one notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the display light emitting unit 53 continues to emit the abnormality notification light. If even one piece of notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the abnormality notification processing is executed in the sound output control task processing (step S505) in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 14). It As a result, when even one notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker unit 54 is continued. Further, when the notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82, a process for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 on the display devices 41, 43, 44 is executed. The details of this process will be described later.

In the notification command handling process, when the notification cancellation command is received from the distribution-side MPU 73 (step S1903: YES), the notification type data corresponding to the notification cancellation command is deleted from the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S1904). ). The management process for determining whether or not the state in which the event for which the abnormality notification is executed has occurred has been executed by the main MPU 62. When the state in which the event that is the target of the abnormality notification has occurred is canceled, the main MPU 62 transmits an abnormality cancellation command including information on the type of the event to the distribution MPU 73. When the distribution-side MPU 73 receives the abnormality resolution command, the distribution-side MPU 73 transmits to the effect CPU 82 a notification cancellation command that includes information on the type of event that triggered the transmission of the abnormality resolution command. By receiving this notification cancellation command, the effect CPU 82 deletes the notification type data corresponding to the notification cancellation command from the register of the effect CPU 82 as described above. As a result, all the abnormality notifications corresponding to the deleted notification type data are completed.

The method for identifying whether or not the state in which the event for which the abnormality notification is executed has occurred in the main MPU 62 is identified by using the detection result of the detection sensor. In case of an event, if the detection result by the detection sensor is the detection result corresponding to the fact that the event has not occurred, the state in which the event for which the abnormality notification is executed has occurred is resolved. It is also possible to specify that the event for which the abnormality notification is executed occurs when the release operation that is set in correspondence with the event for which the abnormality notification is executed is performed. It may be possible to specify that the condition has been resolved, and when the latter condition is satisfied after the former condition is satisfied among these two conditions, the condition for which the abnormality notification is executed occurs. It may be a method of specifying that the is solved.

Next, the notification setting process executed by the effect CPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The notification setting process is executed by the effect calculation process of step S604 in the display control task process (FIG. 15).

When it is not the execution period of the effect for displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 (step S2001: NO), the condition of the notification type data being stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S2002: YES), step S2003. Proceed to. In step S2003, it is determined whether the number of notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is 8 or more.

When the number of notification type data is less than 8 (step S2003: NO), the individual notification image data corresponding to each of all the notification type data is set as a target for setting the drawing list this time. A setting process is executed (step S2004). As a result, the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list that is the current output target to the effect LSI 85.

By receiving the drawing list, the rendering LSI 85 pre-transfers all the individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86, and uses the pre-transferred individual notification image data to obtain the current status. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of all the notification target events that have occurred is displayed in the display range 171 when not operating. In this case, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the non-operating display range 171 according to the order of occurrence of the event, regardless of the priority set for the event to be notified.

When the number of pieces of notification type data is eight or more (step S2003: YES), seven pieces of notification type data are extracted as notification targets in order from the side with the highest priority as described above (step S2005). Then, a setting process is executed so that the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the seven selected notification type data items becomes the setting target of the drawing list this time (step S2006). As a result, the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the seven notification type data extracted in step S2005 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list to be output to the effecting LSI 85 this time.

By receiving the drawing list, the rendering LSI 85 pre-transfers all the individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86, and uses the pre-transferred individual notification image data to perform the step. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of the seven notification target events extracted in S2005 is displayed in the non-operating display range 171. In this case, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the non-operating display range 171 according to the order of occurrence of the event, regardless of the priority set for the event to be notified.

If it is the execution period of the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43, 44 (step S2001: YES), the condition of the notification type data being stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S2007: YES), step S2008. Proceed to. In step S2008, setting is performed so that the common notification image data for displaying the common notification image 175 on either the first sub-display device 43 or the second sub-display device 44 becomes the setting target of the drawing list this time. Execute the process. In this case, as described above, the drawing list information is set so that the types and positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 to be displayed in the common notification image 175 are different depending on the positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44.

After that, when the number of the notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is less than 4 (step S2009: NO), the individual notification image data corresponding to each of all the notification type data is the current notification image data. A setting process for setting the drawing list as a setting target is executed (step S2010). As a result, the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list that is the current output target to the effect LSI 85.

By receiving the drawing list, the rendering LSI 85 transfers all of the common notification image data and the individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86 in advance. Then, by using the pre-transferred common notification image data, the common notification image 175 is displayed at the position corresponding to the current displacement state on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 corresponding to the current displacement state. To do. In addition, by using the individual notification image data that has been transferred in advance, the abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to each of all the notification target events that are currently occurring are displayed in the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation. To be displayed in. In this case, even if the type of the abnormality notification image 176 to be displayed is decreased or increased, the display range 172 to 174 to be displayed of the abnormality notification image 176 that is to be displayed from the timing before that is changed. Not done.

When the number of the notification type data stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 is four or more (step S2009: YES), the three notification type data are notified in order from the side having the higher priority as described above. (Step S2011). Then, a setting process is executed to set the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the three selected notification type data to be the setting target of the drawing list this time (step S2012). As a result, the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the three notification type data extracted in step S2011 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list that is the current output target to the production LSI 85.

By receiving the drawing list, the rendering LSI 85 transfers all of the common notification image data and the individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86 in advance. Then, by using the pre-transferred common notification image data, the common notification image 175 is displayed at the position corresponding to the current displacement state on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 corresponding to the current displacement state. To do. Further, using the previously transferred individual notification image data, the abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to each of the three notification target events extracted in step S2011 are displayed in the first to third display ranges during operation. Display at 172-174. In this case, even if the type of the abnormality notification image 176 to be displayed is decreased or increased, the display range 172 to 174 to be displayed of the abnormality notification image 176 that is to be displayed from the timing before that is changed. Not done.

<Effect of Configuration for Displaying Abnormality Notification Image 176>
Even if the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at predetermined facing positions (positions other than the initial position) where the range facing the display surface of the main display device 41 becomes wider, a case where the notification target event occurs The abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41. As a result, even if the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are not arranged at the predetermined facing positions due to some failure, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41, and the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed to the player or It is possible for the manager of the game hall to recognize it.

On the display surface of the main display device 41, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in a region that does not face the sub display devices 43 and 44 during the entire displacement effect execution period. Accordingly, the visibility of the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the main display device 41 is secured without performing control such as changing the display position of the abnormality notification image 176 according to the positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44. It becomes possible.

In a configuration in which the area for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 on the display surface of the main display device 41 is limited during the execution period of the displacement effect, the number of abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed during the execution period of the displacement effect is a predetermined number. Limited to. As a result, the size of the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41 can be ensured to be large to some extent.

A plurality of types of notification target events have priorities set as the display targets of the abnormality notification image 176, and when the number of notification target events that exceeds the predetermined number occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect, the priority is high. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event on the side is preferentially displayed. As a result, even when the number of the abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed on the main display device 41 is limited to a predetermined number during the displacement effect execution period, the notification target event on the higher priority side is dealt with. The abnormality notification image 176 can be displayed.

When the notification target event occurs in the execution period of the displacement effect, the common notification image 175 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44. This makes it possible to emphasize that the event to be notified has occurred.

The common notification image 175 is a common image that does not correspond to the type of notification target event. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for displaying the common notification image 175 on the sub display devices 43 and 44.

Only one common notification image 175 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 even if the number of occurrences of the notification target event is plural. As a result, it is possible to secure a wide area in which images other than the common notification image 175 are displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44.

<Structure for displaying an image using the special moving image data 185>
Next, a configuration for displaying an image using the special moving image data 185 will be described.

As described above, moving image data exists as image data. As the moving image data, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 57, the memory module 83 includes a normal moving image data group 181 including a plurality of types of normal moving image data 184 and a special moving image data 185 including a plurality of types of special moving image data 185. A moving image data group 182 and an attached image data group 183 including a plurality of types of attached image data are stored in advance.

FIG. 58A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the normal moving image data 184. As for the normal moving image data 184, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data of each frame. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data is one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

The I picture data is data that can be used to create still image data for one frame by itself when decoding. The P picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction by referring to I picture data or P picture data preceding by one frame or a plurality of frames at the time of decoding. .. When decoding B picture data, bidirectional prediction is performed by referring to I picture data or P picture data before one frame or a plurality of frames and I picture data or P picture data after one frame or a plurality of frames at the time of decoding. This is data that can create still image data for one frame.

In the compressed data of the normal moving image data 184, I picture data is set as the data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the second frame,..., M-1 frame. In addition, P picture data is set as the data of the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m+1th frame,..., The n−1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

By performing the decoding process on the normal moving image data 184, the decoded image data 184a to 184d (hereinafter, referred to as normal decoded image data 184a to 184d) for a plurality of update timings from the normal moving image data 184 are registered in the register 93. Will be created in the expansion area 119 (see FIG. 16) for the moving image. The normal decoded image data 184a to 184d are image data in which some of the images displayed by the normal decoded image data 184a to 184d have different contents.

FIG. 58B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the special moving image data 185. In the special moving image data 185, file data is set at the first address, and a plurality of I picture data corresponding to the reference data is subsequently set, but compressed data other than these I picture data is not set. By performing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185, the decoded image data 185a to 185d (hereinafter, referred to as special decoded image data 185a to 185d) for a plurality of update timings from the special moving image data 185 are registered in the register 93. Will be created in the expansion area 119 (see FIG. 16) for the moving image. The special decoded image data 185a to 185d are image data in which the contents of at least some of the images displayed by the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are different from each other.

The amount of the special moving image data 185 is set so that the minimum number of units of decoded image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Specifically, with respect to the minimum number of units of decoded image data, 48 I-picture data are set in the special moving image data 185, and the special moving image data 185 causes 48 special decoded image data 185a to 185d. Is playable. Note that some of the normal moving image data 184 has a data amount set so that the minimum unit number of the normal decoded image data 184a to 184d that can be set as the moving image data can be reproduced, and some of the moving image data is a moving image. In some cases, the data amount is set so that the normal decoded image data 184a to 184d can be created in a number larger than the minimum unit number that can be set as image data.

The special decoded image data 185a to 185d are used as texture data. The memory module 83 stores in advance predetermined object data for applying the special decoded image data 185a to 185d as texture data. The special decoded image data 185a to 185d are applied to the same predetermined object data, and the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are applied to the predetermined object data in the order of the serial numbers of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d. The types of 185a to 185d are sequentially changed. That is, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are continuously changed over a plurality of update timings by sequentially changing the display content of the individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data, the texture data applied to the predetermined object data. It is used as serial number texture data for changing. For example, when the individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data is a character image representing an object other than a person, a cat, a fish, a dog, or an animal, the types of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d applied to the predetermined object data are set. By sequentially changing the special decoded image data 185a to 185d according to the order of the serial numbers, the pattern and color of the character image are continuously changed over a plurality of update timings. Further, for example, when the individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data is a background image, the types of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d to be applied to the predetermined object data are set in the order of the serial numbers of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d. The background image pattern, the background image color, the type of individual image included in the background image, and the display position of the individual image included in the background image are continuously changed over a plurality of update timings in accordance with Will change to.

Since the special moving image data 185 is set as described above, the serial number texture data can be stored in the memory module 83 as one moving image data. The moving image data is pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 as described above, but the decoded image data created by the decoding process being executed by the moving picture decoder 95 is stored in the moving picture expansion area 119 in the register 93. Written. The decoded image data will be stored and held in the moving image development area 119 until the use of all of the decoded image data is completed. By preparing the serial number texture data as the special moving image data 185 in such a configuration, the special moving image data 185 is temporarily stored and held in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 when the serial number texture data is used. However, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d functioning as serial number texture data are stored and held in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93, not in the pre-transfer area 86a. As a result, it becomes possible to use the moving image development area 119 as a read area of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d that is used as a serial number texture.

Further, the compressed data included in the special moving image data 185 are all I picture data, and neither P picture data nor B picture data is included. That is, the same number of I picture data as the number of special decoded image data 185a to 185d after decoding is set, and one special decoded image data 185a to 185d is created from one I picture data. .. As a result, even if the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by decoding the special moving image data 185 is used as texture data, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d is displayed using the special decoded image data 185a to 185d. It is possible to prevent the image quality of the displayed image from deteriorating as compared with the case of using normal texture data.

The attached image data stored in the attached image data group 183 is the plurality of normal moving image data 184 included in the normal moving image data group 181, and the plurality of special moving image data 185 included in the special moving image data group 182, respectively. Are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with. The attached image data displays images corresponding to the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d by the moving image data 184 and 185 while the decoding process is being performed on the corresponding moving image data 184 and 185. It is still image data used for this purpose. Specifically, the attached image data is set so that the content of the image has continuity with the decoded image data of the first use order in the corresponding plurality of decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d. .. For example, the attached image data corresponding to the special moving image data 185 is the texture data applied to the predetermined object data corresponding to the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created from the special moving image data 185.

The manner in which the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 is executed during the period in which the image is displayed using the attached image data will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 59. FIG. 59A shows a period during which an image is displayed using the attached image data, FIG. 59B shows a decoding period of the moving image data 184 and 185, and FIG. 59C shows the decoded image data 184a. ~184d, 185a to 185d are used to indicate a period during which an image is displayed.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 59(b), it becomes the timing to start the decoding processing of one piece of moving image data 184, 185. As a result, as shown in FIG. An image display period using the attached image data corresponding to the data 184 and 185 is started. After that, at a timing t2 which is a timing in the middle of the display period of the image using the attached image data, the decoding processing of the one moving image data 184, 185 is completed as shown in FIG. 59(b). As a result, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created from the moving image data 184 and 185 are stored in the moving image expansion area 119 of the register 93. After that, at the timing of t3, the display of the image using the attached image data is finished as shown in FIG. 59A, and the decoded image data 184a to 184a to 184a created by the above-described decoding process are shown as shown in FIG. 59C. The image display period using 184d and 185a to 185d is started. This display period ends at the timing of t4 when the display of the image using the decoded image data of the last order in the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created by the above decoding process ends.

As described above, the attached image data is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the moving image data 184, 185, and the decoding processing of the moving image data 184, 185 is performed by using the image display period using the attached image data. Is executed. As a result, the decoding process of the moving image data 184, 185 is executed under the condition that the image corresponding to the image subsequently displayed using the decoded image data 184a-184d, 185a-185d is displayed. .. Therefore, it is possible to execute the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 without causing a waiting time for image display while ensuring the continuity of image display.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for displaying an image using the moving image data 184 and 185 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a moving image data use setting process executed by the effect CPU 82. The moving image data use setting process is executed by the background calculation process of step S603 or the effect calculation process of step S604 in the task process (FIG. 15).

If it is not the period of use of the moving image data 184, 185 (step S2101: NO), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the decoding processing of one moving image data 184, 185 (step S2102). When it is the timing to start the decoding process (step S2102: YES), one moving image data 184, 185 to be decoded this time is grasped (step S2103), and the moving image data 184, 185 is stored. The corresponding attached image data is grasped (step S2104). Then, the decoding designation information indicating that the decoding process should be executed is set in the current drawing list (step S2105).

By executing the processes of steps S2103 to S2105, one piece of moving image data 184, 185 and the corresponding attached image data are set as the image data to be used in the current drawing list. When the moving image data 184 and 185 are set in the drawing list, the moving image data 184 and 185 are pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 and the pre-transferred moving image data 184 is already described. , 185 is decoded by the moving picture decoder 95. However, in the drawing process corresponding to the drawing list this time, the moving image data 184, 185 and the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d created from the moving image data 184, 185 are not the targets of the drawing process. Instead, the attached image data is subjected to the drawing process instead.

When a negative determination is made in step S2102, or when the process of step S2105 is executed, various image data other than the moving image data 184 and 185 and the attached image data are grasped as the setting targets in the drawing list this time (step S2106). ). Then, the parameter information applied to the various image data set in the drawing list this time is updated and grasped as the setting target in the drawing list (step S2107).

Here, as described above, when the moving image data 184 and 185 are set in the drawing list, the advance transfer control unit 94 of the production LSI 85 makes a positive determination in step S1013 in the advance transfer process (FIG. 29). An instruction to decode the moving image data 184 and 185 is issued to the moving image decoder 95 of the effect LSI 85 (step S1014). At the time of this decoding instruction, the moving image decoder 95 can specify the area in the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 in which the moving image data 184, 185 that is the object of the current decoding instruction is stored. And the area for storing the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d obtained by the decoding processing of the moving image data 184 and 185 in the moving image expansion area 119 in the register 93 can be specified in the moving image decoder 95. And the information for this are provided to the moving picture decoder 95.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a decoding process executed by the moving picture decoder 95. In the decoding process, based on the information provided by the advance transfer control unit 94, the address of the area where the moving image data 184, 185 that is the target of the current decoding instruction is stored in the data storage area 123 is grasped ( Step S2201). In addition, based on the information provided by the advance transfer control unit 94, the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d obtained by the decoding process for the moving image data 184 and 185 are stored in the moving image expansion area 119 in the register 93. The address of the area to be activated is grasped (step S2202). Then, the moving image data 184, 185 is read from the data storage area 123 corresponding to the address recognized in step S2201, and the moving image data 184, 185 is decoded. Then, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d of the decoding result are written in the respective areas of the address grasped in step S2202 (step S2203). As a result, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created from the moving image data 184 and 185 are expanded in the expansion area 119 for moving images in the register 93. In this case, the decoded image data of the first order in the created decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d is stored in the area of the start address in the moving image expansion area 119. Then, the subsequent decoded image data is sequentially stored in an area continuous with the area of the start address.

Returning to the description of the use setting process of the moving image data (FIG. 60 ), when the moving image data 184 and 185 are in the use period (step S2101: YES), the decoding corresponding to the value of the frame counter provided in the work memory 84 is performed. The image data is grasped as the setting target for the drawing list this time (step S2108). The frame counter sets the number of the decoded image data among the plurality of decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created by performing the decoding process on one piece of moving image data 184 and 185 as the current use target. This is a counter for specifying in the rendering CPU 82 whether or not to perform, and is cleared to "0" at the timing to start displaying an image using the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d, and then one decoded image One is added every time the data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are set in the drawing list as targets of use. When the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d corresponding to the value of the frame counter are set to be used in the drawing list, an area corresponding to the value of the frame counter in the moving image expansion area 119 in the register 93 of the production LSI 85. Address is set as address information. Thus, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 of the production LSI 85 can specify the area in which the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d to be used are stored, and the specified area. The decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are read out from and are drawn.

After that, various image data other than the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are grasped as the setting targets in the drawing list this time (step S2109). Further, the parameter information applied to the various image data set in the drawing list this time is updated and grasped as the setting target in the drawing list (step S2110). Then, the use instruction information of the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d indicating that the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d should be used is set in the current drawing list (step S2111).

As described above, the pre-transfer control unit 94 pre-transfers the image data set in the drawing list received from the rendering CPU 82 to the pre-transfer area 86a. However, the decoded image data 184a to 184d are used as the target of the drawing list. , 185a to 185d are set, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d have already been stored in the moving image expansion area 119 in the register 93 at that time, and therefore, to the pre-transfer area 86a. Do not pre-transfer. Specifically, in the pre-transfer process (FIG. 29), it is determined in step S1003 whether the current transfer target data is the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d, and the current transfer target data is the decoded image data. If it is determined to be 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d (step S1003: YES), the process for performing the pre-transfer shown in steps S1004 to S1012 is not executed.

Further, as described above, the pre-transfer control unit 94 rewrites the address information set in the drawing list received from the rendering CPU 82 for the image data pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a (FIG. 30). However, as described above, since the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are not subject to the pre-transfer to the pre-transfer area 86a, the rewriting process of the address information is performed for the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d. (FIG. 30) is not executed. Specifically, in the pre-transfer process (FIG. 29), it is determined in step S1003 whether the current transfer target data is the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d, and the current transfer target data is the decoded image data. If it is determined to be 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d (step S1003: YES), the rewriting process of the address information shown in step S1015 is not executed. As described above, regarding the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d, in the drawing list transmitted from the rendering CPU 82, the address of the area stored in the moving image expansion area 119 in the register 93 is used as the address information. It is set.

<Effect of configuration for displaying image using special moving image data 185>
Since the special moving image data 185 including the I picture data is provided without including the B picture data and the P picture data which are the difference data, the special moving image data 185 is created by performing the decoding process. The special decoded image data 185a to 185d can have higher image quality than the normal decoded image data 184a to 184d created by performing the decoding process on the normal moving image data 184. That is, according to the present configuration, it is possible to handle image data having the same image quality as normal still image data as moving image data. As a result, it is possible to use image data having the same image quality as the normal still image data without using the area for reading the normal still image data.

The special moving image data 185 includes a plurality of I picture data. Accordingly, by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185, it is possible to create a plurality of image data having the same image quality as the normal still image data.

The plurality of special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185 are used according to the use order defined in the special moving image data 185. Accordingly, when using the plurality of special decoded image data 185a to 185d, it is not necessary to set the use order separately from the special moving image data 185. Therefore, compared with the configuration in which the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are stored in advance in the memory module 83 as normal still image data, it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting the use order of the image data.

During the period in which the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 perform the drawing process, the moving image decoder 95 provided separately from the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 decodes the special moving image data 185. Executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 from increasing and prevent the period in which the decoding process is being performed from being the image display waiting period.

Ancillary image data is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the moving image data 184, 185, and the decoding processing of the moving image data 184, 185 is executed using the image display period using the attached image data. It As a result, the decoding process of the moving image data 184, 185 is executed under the condition that the image corresponding to the image subsequently displayed using the decoded image data 184a-184d, 185a-185d is displayed. .. Therefore, it is possible to execute the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 without causing a waiting time for image display while ensuring the continuity of image display.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are configured to display only 2D images without displaying 3D images. However, in the present embodiment, the sub display devices are similar to the main display device 41. Both 43D and 43D can display both 2D and 3D images. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing area 191 for sub display in the present embodiment. Similar to the sub-display drawing area 116 in the first embodiment, the sub-display drawing area 191 is provided with a sub-first frame area 117 and a sub-second frame area 118. Further, in the drawing area 191 for sub display, in addition to the frame areas 117 and 118, drawing data for displaying a 2D image on the first sub display device 43 is created, and a 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub is created. A 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub in which drawing data for displaying a 3D image on the first sub display device 43 is created, and drawing data for displaying a 2D image on the second sub display device 44. A 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub to be created and a 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub to create drawing data for displaying a 3D image on the second sub display device 44 are provided. ..

In each of the sub first frame area 117 and the sub second frame area 118, drawing data created in the first sub 2D drawing area 192 and drawing created in the first sub 3D drawing area 193. By combining the data with the drawing data for one frame to be displayed on the first sub display device 43, the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub and the drawing data for the second sub are created. The one-frame drawing data to be displayed on the second sub display device 44 is created by synthesizing the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the drawing data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43 is set in a distributed manner in the horizontal odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame regions 117 and 118, and the frame regions 117 and 118 are set. The drawing data corresponding to the second sub display device 44 is dispersed and set on the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for creating drawing data in the frame areas 117 and 118 will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a sub-display drawing data combination process executed by the 3D control unit 97. The drawing data combination process for sub-display is executed as a part of the drawing data combination process of step S814 in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20).

When drawing data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 is created (step S2301: YES), first, the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is set as an output source area (step S2302). After that, setting processing for the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2303). When the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is set as the output source area, the drawing number counter sets the vertical line as one unit for the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 uses the number of vertical lines in the horizontal direction. In step S2303, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is set in the drawing number counter.

Then, in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub, vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is extracted (step S2304). Further, among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 are identified. The vertical line data extracted in step S2304 is drawn on the vertical line (step S2305).

After that, the value of the drawing number counter is decremented by 1 (step S2306). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing number counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2307). When the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processes of steps S2304 and S2305 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing of steps S2304 and S2305, the drawing of the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub in the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

After that, the 2D rendering area 192 for the first sub is set as the area of the output source (step S2308). Then, the setting processing for the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2309). When the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub is set as the output source area, the drawing number counter sets the vertical line as one unit for the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 uses the number of vertical lines in the horizontal direction. In step S2309, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub is set in the drawing number counter.

Then, in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub, vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is extracted (step S2310). Further, among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 are identified. The vertical line data extracted in step S2310 is drawn on the vertical line (step S2311).

Here, in the vertical lines of the frame areas 117 and 118, part of the drawing data already created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is drawn. Therefore, in step S2311, any of color information overwrite processing, color information blending processing, and color information non-setting is performed according to the α data attached to the vertical line data extracted in step S2310. To execute. Specifically, when the α data corresponds to the non-transparency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2310 is directly overwritten on the vertical lines to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118. If the α data corresponds to semi-transparency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2310 and the data set in the vertical lines to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 are made to correspond to the α data value. And blend. If the α data corresponds to complete transparency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2310 is not set. As a result, it is possible to create drawing data as a result of superposing the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub. It will be possible.

Then, the value of the drawing number counter is decremented by 1 (step S2312). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing number counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2313). When the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processes of steps S2310 and S2311 are executed for the data of the vertical line corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing of steps S2310 and S2311, the drawing of the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub to the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

On the other hand, when drawing data corresponding to the second sub display device 44 is created (step S2301: NO), the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is set as the output source area (step S2314). After that, a setting process for the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2315). When the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is set as the output source area, the drawing number counter sets the vertical line as one unit for the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 uses the number of vertical lines in the horizontal direction. In step S2315, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is set in the drawing number counter.

Then, in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub, vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is extracted (step S2316). Further, among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 are identified. The vertical line data extracted in step S2316 is drawn on the vertical line (step S2317).

Then, the value of the drawing number counter is decremented by 1 (step S2318). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing number counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2319). If the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processes of steps S2316 and S2317 are executed for the data of the vertical line corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processes of steps S2316 and S2317, drawing of the drawing data created in the second sub 3D drawing area 195 into the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

After that, the 2D rendering area 194 for the second sub is set as the area of the output source (step S2320). Then, the setting process for the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2321). When the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub is set as the area of the output source, the drawing number counter sets the vertical line as one unit for the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 uses the number of vertical lines in the horizontal direction. In step S2321, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the second sub 2D drawing area 194 is set in the drawing number counter.

After that, the vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is extracted from the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub (step S2322). Further, among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 to be drawn, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the specified frame areas 117 and 118 are identified. The vertical line data extracted in step S2322 is drawn on the vertical line (step S2323).

Here, part of the drawing data already created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is drawn on the vertical lines of the frame areas 117 and 118. Therefore, in step S2323, any one of color information overwrite processing, color information blending processing, and color information non-setting is performed according to the α data attached to the vertical line data extracted in step S2322. To execute. Specifically, when the α data corresponds to the non-transparency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2322 is directly overwritten on the vertical lines to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118. If the α data corresponds to semi-transparency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2322 and the data set in the vertical lines to be drawn in the frame regions 117 and 118 are associated with the α data value. And blend. If the α data corresponds to complete transparency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2322 is not set. This makes it possible to create drawing data as a result of overlapping drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub and drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub. It will be possible.

Then, the value of the drawing number counter is decremented by 1 (step S2324). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the drawing number counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2325). When the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processes of steps S2322 and S2323 are executed for the data of the vertical line corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing of step S2322 and step S2323, drawing of the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub to the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even if the 2D image and the 3D image can be simultaneously displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44, the drawing for displaying the image on the first sub display device 43 is performed. Both the data and the drawing data for displaying the image on the second sub display device 44 can be simultaneously created in one frame area 117, 118.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the address information rewriting process (FIG. 30 in the first embodiment) in the advance transfer control unit 94 is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the address information rewriting process in this embodiment. First, the area of the VRAM 86 to which the image data to be transferred this time is transferred is set as a new index area (step S2401). In this embodiment, the VRAM 86 is not set with the advance transfer area 86a having the data storage area 123. Therefore, the image data to be transferred is not transferred to the data storage area 123, but is the image data set in the drawing list this time or earlier, and is not the target of execution of the drawing process. The data is transferred to an area different from the area where the data is stored.

After that, the index table provided in the register 93 is rewritten (step S2402). The index table is a table in which the correspondence relationship between the index information for specifying the index area and the address group of the area of the VRAM 86 to which the image data to be transferred this time is transferred is set. Correspondences between the index information and the address groups of the areas of the VRAM 86 are set in the index table for the number of pieces of image data previously transferred to the VRAM 86. In the rewriting process of the index table, the index information for specifying the index region newly set in step S2401 and the address group of the area of the VRAM 86 to which the image data to be transferred this time are transferred are associated with each other. Write to the index table in the open state.

After that, the index information for specifying the newly set index area is overwritten on the address information corresponding to the image data that is the current transfer target in the drawing list (step S2403). When drawing the image data, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 read index information corresponding to the image data from the address information of the drawing list, and provide the read index information to the transfer controller 92. The transfer controller 92 grasps the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the provided index information from the index table, and supplies the image data read from the area of the VRAM 86 to the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the relationship between the type of the index area and the area of the VRAM 86 is changed as necessary, so that the aggregate designation of the areas of the VRAM 86 using the index area can be used flexibly. Is possible.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists are provided from the rendering CPU 82 as a rendering list for displaying an image at one update timing, the advance transfer control unit of the rendering LSI 85 is provided. At 94, the drawing lists are integrated. The different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the drawing list output process in the present embodiment which is executed by the effect CPU 82.

First, 2D image data aggregation processing is executed (step S2501). In this aggregation processing, all image data to be set in the 2D drawing list in this processing time are specified. After that, it is determined whether or not the number of 2D image data collected in step S2501 is equal to or larger than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S2502). When the number of 2D image data collected in step S2501 is less than the reference number (step S2502: NO), one 2D drawing list is created (step S2503). All of the 2D image data collected in step S2501 are set in the one 2D drawing list. Then, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last-order image data in the 2D drawing list (step S2504). The 2D control unit 96 determines in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19) whether or not the creation completion data is set, and thereby the designation is made in one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame. It is specified that the drawing process has been completed for all the image data being displayed.

On the other hand, when the number of 2D image data collected in step S2501 is equal to or larger than the reference number (step S2502: YES), two 2D drawing lists are created (step S2505). In this case, the 2D image data collected in step S2501 is dispersed and set in two 2D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. In each of these two 2D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of the two 2D drawing lists, the 2D control unit 96 first sets the integration instruction information in the 2D drawing list that is the target of execution of the drawing process (step S2506). Specifically, the integration instruction information is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 2D drawing list. The integration instruction information instructs the pre-transfer control unit 94 to integrate two consecutive drawing lists that have been subjected to the pre-transfer processing in the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the production LSI 85 into one drawing list. This is information for. Then, the creation completion data is set in the 2D drawing list, which is the target of the drawing process later, in the 2D control unit 96 of these two 2D drawing lists (step S2507). Specifically, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 2D drawing list.

In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S2504 or step S2507 is executed, the 3D image data aggregation process is executed (step S2508). In this aggregation processing, all the image data to be set in the 3D drawing list in this processing time are specified. Then, it is determined whether the number of 3D image data collected in step S2508 is equal to or larger than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S2509). If the number of 3D image data collected in step S2508 is less than the reference number (step S2509: NO), one 3D drawing list is created (step S2510). All the 3D image data collected in step S2508 are set in the one 3D drawing list. Then, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last image data in the 3D drawing list (step S2511). The 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not the creation completion data is set in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20) to specify in one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to the image display for one frame. It is specified that the drawing process has been completed for all the image data being displayed.

On the other hand, when the number of 3D image data collected in step S2508 is equal to or larger than the reference number (step S2509: YES), two 3D drawing lists are created (step S2512). In this case, the 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is dispersed and set in two 3D drawing lists while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. The number of image data in each of these two 3D drawing lists is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 3D drawing lists, the 3D control unit 97 first sets integration instruction information in the 3D drawing list that is the target of execution of the drawing process (step S2513). Specifically, the integration instruction information is set in association with the display order priority data for the last-order image data in the 3D drawing list. After that, the creation completion data is set in the 3D drawing list, which is the target of the drawing process later, in the 3D control unit 97 of these two 3D drawing lists (step S2514). Specifically, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the last-order image data in the 3D drawing list.

In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S2511 or step S2514 is executed, other processes are executed (step S2515). In other processing, the processing of steps S919 to S921 of the drawing list output processing (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment is executed. Note that the process of steps S901 to S906 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment may be executed before step S2501.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the pre-transfer process in this embodiment executed by the pre-transfer control unit 94.

First, other processing is executed (step S2601). In other processing, the processing of steps S1001 to S1015 of the pre-transfer processing (FIG. 29) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, it is determined whether or not the integration instruction information is set in the current drawing list, on condition that the pre-transfer for one drawing list is completed in the current processing time (step S2602: YES). (Step S2603). When the integration instruction information is set (step S2603: YES), the drawing lists set in the following order are previously set in the pre-transfer storage area 121 in the register 93 with respect to the drawing list for which the pre-transfer is completed this time. The data is read as an execution target of the transfer process (step S2604). After that, "1" is set to the integrated flag provided in the register 93 (step S2605).

On the other hand, if the integration instruction information is not set in the drawing list this time (step S2603: NO), the integration process is performed on condition that the integration flag of the register 93 is set to “1” (step S2606: YES). Is executed (step S2607). In the integration processing, the drawing list for which the integration instruction information is set and the drawing list for which the pre-transfer is completed this time are integrated as one drawing list. In this case, the image data set in each drawing list is collected in one drawing list while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. After that, the integration flag of the register 93 is cleared to "0" (step S2608).

If a negative determination is made in step S2606, or if the process of step S2608 is executed, the pre-transfer completion process is executed (step S2609). In the pre-transfer completion process, if the drawing list for which the pre-transfer is completed this time is not the target of the integration process (step S2607), the drawing list is stored in the post-transfer storage area 122 of the register 93 for this time. Storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, when the drawing list for which the pre-transfer is completed this time is the target of the integration process (step S2607), one drawing list after the integration process is stored this time in the storage area 122 for transfer in the register 93. The data is stored in the target storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists are provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing, The plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists are integrated into one drawing list in the advance transfer control unit 94 of the LSI 85. This eliminates the need to refer to the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists when the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97 executes the drawing process according to the drawing list.

The above-described integration of the drawing lists is executed when the pre-transfer control unit 94 completes the pre-transfer processing of the image data for the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists. As a result, it is possible to use the opportunity of pre-transferring the image data as an opportunity to integrate the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists.

Note that the number of drawing lists to be subjected to the integration processing is not limited to two, and three or more 2D drawing lists or three or more 3D drawing lists for displaying an image for one frame. If the list is supplied from the effect CPU 82, the number may be three. In addition, the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list provided from the effect CPU 82 to display the image for one frame may be a target of execution of the integration process.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. By the way, the configuration of the following different embodiment may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) When the image data already read in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is newly set as a read target in the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82, the image data is the data of the pre-transfer area 86a. Instead of the configuration limited to the configuration that is copied between the storage areas 123, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 in which the image data is already stored is the address information of the drawing list without performing the copy. It may be configured to be set to. In this case, the image data to be read cannot be stored in the data storage area 123 on which the image data is to be written, but it is not necessary to copy the image data between the data storage areas 123.

(2) A history area may be provided separately from the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, and the image data pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a may be stored in the history area in the order of the pre-transfer. In this case, a storage area capable of storing a plurality of image data such as 256 and 512 is secured as a history area. Then, the plurality of storage areas become the storage targets of the image data in accordance with the predetermined order, and when the image data is stored in the storage area of the last order, the storage area of the first order stores the image data of the image data. It is the configuration that is the storage target. With this configuration, each time the image data is newly transferred to the advance transfer area 86a, the image data is stored in the storage area that is the storage target in the history area. When the image data specified in the drawing list provided from the effect CPU 82 is to be read into the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is first stored in any of the history areas. It is specified whether or not it is not stored in the area. If the image data is stored in any one of the storage areas of the history area, the image data stored in the storage area is read out to the pre-transfer area 86a. On the other hand, when the image data is not stored in any of the storage areas of the history area, the image data is read from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a, and the read image data is the current storage target in the history area. Stored in the storage area. Even with this configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency of reading image data from the memory module 83. Further, with this configuration, since the history area is provided separately from the advance transfer area 86a, only the image data specified as the use target in the drawing list provided to the production LSI 85 is provided in the advance transfer area 86a. It can be read. The history area may be provided in a RAM different from the VRAM 86.

(3) Instead of the configuration in which only the address ID corresponding to the start address of the address ID group set in the address information of the drawing list provided from the rendering CPU 82 is set in the search table 125, the final address is set. Only the corresponding address ID may be set in the search table 125, or only the address ID corresponding to the intermediate address may be set in the search table 125. Further, the address ID corresponding to the start address and the address ID corresponding to the last address may be set in the search table 125, or the entire address ID group may be set in the search table 125. .. This makes it possible to more accurately specify the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a.

(4) Instead of the configuration in which the address ID is set in the search table 125 as information for identifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123, for example, identification information is set in each image data. In this case, the identification information may be set in the search table 125 as information for identifying the type of the image data. In this case, if the identification information has a smaller amount of information than one address ID, the amount of information for specifying the type of the image data can be reduced.

(5) A resident area is provided in the VRAM 86 in addition to the pre-transfer area 86a, and the fluctuation start image data and the abnormality notification image data necessary for starting the game game effect are operated by the operation power to the effect CPU 82. May be read into the resident area when the supply of is started, and the read state may be maintained while the operating power is supplied. In this case, the image can be displayed using the image data read from the resident area even if the start condition for starting the game use effect and the start condition for starting the abnormality notification are satisfied at an arbitrary timing. As compared with the case of reading the image data from the memory module 83, it is possible to shorten the period required from the satisfaction of the start condition to the start of the image display.

(6) A configuration in which the data to be read has already been read out to the RAM, and the data is not read out from the ROM. The configuration of copying data between areas of the RAM may be applied to data other than image data.

(7) When the pre-transfer of the image data specified in the drawing list to the pre-transfer area 86a is completed, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 of the transfer destination is overwritten on the address information of the drawing list. The configuration is not limited, and the identification information may be set as information different from the address information in the drawing list. Even in this case, since the information corresponding to the transfer destination area is not set in the drawing list provided by the effect CPU 82, it is possible to reduce the information amount of the drawing list.

(8) The pre-transfer control unit 94 identifies whether or not the image data specified in the drawing list has been stored in the data storage area 123 of the transfer destination in the pre-transfer area 86a, and the stored state is determined. When it is specified that the data storage area 123 is identified, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be set in the drawing list. Thus, setting the identification information in the drawing list means that the reading of the image data is completed.

(9) Instead of the configuration in which the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data 184 and 185 are stored in the register 93, data storage in the pre-transfer area 86a is performed. The configuration may be stored in the area 123. In the configuration, if the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are stored in one data storage area 123, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are stored in the data storage area. When stored in 123, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be set in the address information of the drawing list. Further, in such a configuration in which the identification information is set even for the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d, the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or more in the drawing list is displayed in the immediately preceding display order. The area where the addresses are continuous is read from the area where the image data corresponding to the priority data is read. Therefore, only the offset value can be set in the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later in the drawing list. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of address information after the pre-transfer of image data is completed.

(10) When the pre-transfer of the image data is completed, the image data whose display order priority data is “1” or later in the drawing list is not limited to the configuration in which the offset value is set as the address information. Even in the case of data, the address information may have a configuration in which identification information that is information for specifying the address of the area from which the image data is read is set.

(11) When the pre-transfer of the data specified in the instruction information such as the drawing list is completed, the configuration for setting the information corresponding to the transfer destination area of the data in the instruction information is used for displaying the image. You may apply to the structure which uses the instruction information different from a list.

(12) Instead of the configuration in which a maximum of two 2D drawing lists are provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing, three or four or more 2D drawing lists are displayed. The list may be provided. Further, in place of the configuration in which a maximum of two 3D drawing lists are provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 for displaying an image at one update timing, three or four or more 3D drawing lists are provided. May be provided.

(13) Instead of the configuration in which a plurality of drawing lists are always provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 to display the image at the one update timing, one drawing list is displayed to display the image at the one update timing. Only the drawing list may be provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85. For example, in a configuration that does not have a function of displaying a 3D image, only one 2D drawing list is provided. In this case, if the 2D image data to be used at one update timing is less than the reference number, only one drawing list is provided, and the 2D image data to be used at one update timing is set as the reference. A plurality of drawing lists may be provided as long as the number is greater than or equal to the number.

(14) The 2D image data and the 3D image data are not limited to a configuration in which they are set in different drawing lists, and the 2D image data and the 3D image data are the same drawing list. It may be configured to be set to. In this case, the number of drawing lists provided from the effect CPU 82 can be reduced. However, in the configuration, it is necessary to clearly distinguish the 2D image data and the 3D image data in the drawing list. As a configuration for the distinction, specifically, the display order priority data of a predetermined numerical value range is set for the 2D image data, and the 3D image data is a specific numerical value range that does not overlap with the predetermined numerical value range. A configuration is conceivable in which the display order priority data of is set. As a result, even if the 2D image data and the 3D image data are collectively set in the same drawing list, the 2D image data and the 3D image data are set in the drawing list. It is possible to make a clear distinction in.

In the configuration in which the 2D image data and the 3D image data are aggregated and set in the same drawing list as described above, one of the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 draws the drawing list. Since the drawing process using the drawing list is executed on the other side after the drawing process using is completed, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of the same drawing list from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85.

(15) The image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 is not limited to a configuration in which the image data is collectively set in one drawing list, and a part thereof is set. The image data corresponding to the display device may be set in a drawing list different from the image data corresponding to the other display device. For example, a rendering list in which only image data corresponding to the main display device 41 is set and a rendering list in which image data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 are set are generated from the effect CPU 82. The configuration may be provided, or the rendering list corresponding to each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 may be provided from the effect CPU 82. In this case, since the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set are distinguished in units of drawing lists, the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 are specified. Will be easier to do.

(16) The drawing list provided from the effect CPU 82 may be divided into a plurality of drawing lists in the effect LSI 85, and each of the divided drawing lists may be used by the 2D control unit 96 or the 3D control unit 97. Good. For example, one rendering list in which the image data for 2D and the image data for 3D are aggregated to be used is provided from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85, and the rendering LSI 85 pre-transfers the image data. It is also possible to divide the one drawing list into a drawing list in which image data for 2D is set and a drawing list in which image data for 3D is set at timing or the like. Thereby, the drawing lists corresponding to the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 are individually provided to the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 while the number of the drawing lists provided from the effect CPU 82 is kept small. It becomes possible to do.

(17) A plurality of the same drawing list may be provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85. In this case, for example, not only the address ID corresponding to the storage source area in the memory module 83 of the image data but also the information corresponding to the storage destination area of the image data in the VRAM 86 is set in the drawing list. One drawing list of the same plurality of drawing lists may be provided to the pre-transfer control unit 94, and one drawing list may be provided to the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97. According to this configuration, the drawing list for which the pre-transfer control unit 94 has not completed the pre-transfer of all image data can be the execution target of the drawing process in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97.

(18) When a read completion flag is provided corresponding to each data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a, and when the advance transfer control unit 94 completes the transfer of the image data to the transfer destination data storage area 123, “1” may be set to the read completion flag corresponding to the data storage area 123. In this case, when the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 read the image data from the data storage area 123 on condition that the reading completion flag is set to “1”, and the image data is read. Alternatively, the read completion flag corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be cleared to "0". As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the image data read processing from the data storage area 123 where the image data read has not been completed from being executed.

(19) The number of areas of the VRAM 86 collectively designated by the identification information of one of the index areas 127a to 127c may be different for each of the index areas 127a to 127c. This makes it possible to specify an area having a size suitable for the type of data to be stored in each of the index areas 127a to 127c with one piece of identification information.

(20) The index areas 127a to 127c are not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 are designated by one piece of identification information, and a configuration in which one area of the VRAM 86 is designated by one piece of identification information is also possible. Good. Further, there may be an index area in which one area of the VRAM 86 is designated by one piece of identification information and an index area in which a plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 are designated by one piece of identification information.

(21) One index area 127a to 127c may include an area of the VRAM 86 whose addresses are not continuous, and an area of which the addresses are not continuous is included as the area of the VRAM 86 specified by one identification information. It may be configured.

(22) The special moving image data 185 is not limited to the configuration in which a plurality of types of I picture data are set, and the special moving image data 185 may have a configuration in which only one type of I picture data is set. .. In this case, only one type of special decoded image data is created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185. Even with this configuration, still image data such as texture data can be read into an area of the VRAM 86 different from the pre-transfer area 86a.

Further, in this configuration, a plurality of I-picture data of the same type may be set in the special moving image data 185. In this case, a plurality of the same special decoded image data are created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185. In the configuration, when the same special decoded image data is used over a plurality of update timings, the same special decoded image data is used only by using the special decoded image data according to the usage order corresponding to the special moving image data 185. It becomes possible to use it over a plurality of update timings. Further, when a plurality of the same special decoded image data is created in this way, only one of the special decoded image data is used and the remaining special decoded image data is stored after the decoding process. The area may be deleted from the existing area.

(23) The VRAM 86 or the register 93 is provided with a separate storage area, and the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185 is separately stored in the separate storage area. May be In this case, even if the usage period of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d is once ended, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d is read from the separate storage area at the time of the next use, so that the special moving image data 185 is read. It is not necessary to perform the decoding process again for.

(24) The special moving image data 185 has difference data such as B picture data and P picture data, but the difference data may be set so that the difference becomes “0”. In this case, a plurality of the same special decoded image data will be created.

(25) All of the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 83 as still image data is read out from the memory module 83 when the supply of operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started, and the texture data of the VRAM 86 is used. The structure may be written in the area. In this case, the storage capacity required in the texture area increases as the type of texture data increases. On the other hand, if the type of texture data read in the texture area is changed every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load on the production LSI 85 increases. On the other hand, by storing some of the texture data as the special moving image data 185, it is possible to expand some of the texture data for the moving image in the register 93 as necessary while eliminating the need to replace the texture area. It becomes possible to read out to the area 119. Further, when the moving image development area 119 is also used as an area for using the texture data, the texture data itself is not read into the moving image development area 119, and decoding processing is performed on the special moving image data 185. Since the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by the execution is read, the handling of the moving image development area 119 in the production LSI 85 is changed according to the type of data read to the moving image development area 119. No need arises.

Further, in the above configuration, not only the texture data but also the object data may be read from the memory module 83 to the object area of the VRAM 86 when the supply of the operating power to the effect CPU 82 is started. In this case, it is not necessary to read the object data into the VRAM 86 at an appropriate timing.

(26) Drawing data for displaying an image on the first sub display device 43 (hereinafter, also referred to as first drawing data), and drawing data for displaying an image on the second sub display device 44 (hereinafter, referred to as second drawing data). (Also referred to as drawing data) is set in one frame area 117, 118, and the first drawing data and the second drawing data are distributed to odd-numbered vertical lines and even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal arrangement order. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the drawing data and the drawing data are distributed and set.

For example, the first drawing data may be set in the left half of one frame area 117, 118, and the second drawing data may be set in the right half. Further, for example, the first drawing data may be set in the upper half of one frame area 117, 118, and the second drawing data may be set in the lower half. Further, for example, the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set in a distributed manner by being distributed to the odd-numbered horizontal lines and the even-numbered horizontal lines in the vertical arrangement order in one frame area 117, 118. It may be configured. In addition, the first drawing partial data forming a part of the first drawing data and the second drawing partial data forming a part of the second drawing data are not alternately arranged in units of one line, The minimum unit dot of one drawing data and the minimum unit dot of the second drawing data may be arranged alternately in each of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

(27) The number of dots of the first sub-display device 43 and the number of dots of the second sub-display device 44 are not limited to the same, and the number of dots of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device are not limited. The number of dots of 44 may be different. In this case, the number of dots included in the area reserved for setting the first drawing data and the number of dots included in the area reserved for setting the second drawing data in one frame area 117, 118. May have different configurations or may have the same configurations depending on the difference in the number of dots.

(28) When one of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is hidden behind the center frame 42 and is not visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the other display device is not visible. It may be configured such that a situation in which it becomes visible can occur. In this case, no image may be displayed on the one display device hidden behind the center frame 42. Even with this configuration, drawing data for displaying an image on the other display device is set in a part of the area corresponding to the drawing data in one frame area 117, 118. In the configuration, the drawing data corresponding to the one display device may not be set, and although the image is not displayed on the one display device, the drawing data corresponding to the one display device is set. It may be configured to be opened. When the drawing data corresponding to the one display device is set, the one frame area 117, 118 is displayed regardless of whether or not an image is displayed on the one display device. On the other hand, both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set.

The same color display may be performed on the one display device hidden behind the center frame 42. In this case, since the drawing data for displaying the same color is set as the drawing data corresponding to the one display device, the one display device is hidden behind the center frame 42. Both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set for one frame area 117, 118 regardless of whether or not there is a situation.

(29) When each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is arranged at the initial position, they may be hidden behind the center frame 42 to be invisible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, when each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is arranged at the initial position, no image is displayed on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. It is also possible to have a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set. Further, when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial positions, the same color display is performed on the sub display devices 43 and 44, and the same color display is performed on one frame area 117 and 118. Both the first drawing data and the second drawing data for performing the above may be set. In this case, the same color information (numerical value information) is set for all the dots in the one frame area 117, 118.

(30) Only the first drawing data is set in one frame area 117, 118 at a predetermined drawing timing, and only the second drawing data is set in the one frame area 117, 118 at another drawing timing. Good. In this case, a part of the one frame area 117, 118 may be an area for setting the first drawing data and the other area may be an area for setting the second drawing data. If the drawing timing is such that one drawing data is set, the first drawing data is set over the entire one frame area 117, 118, and if the drawing timing is such that the second drawing data is set, the second drawing data is set. The frame areas 117 and 118 may be set over the entire frame areas.

(31) By inputting one pulse of the clock signal, the image signal corresponding to one dot in the first drawing data is output to the first sub-display device 43, and the image signal corresponding to one dot in the second drawing data is output. The configuration is not limited to being output to the second sub display device 44, and an image signal corresponding to a plurality of dots in the first drawing data is output to the first sub display device 43 by inputting one pulse of the clock signal. In addition, an image signal corresponding to a plurality of dots in the second drawing data may be output to the second sub display device 44. Further, the number of dots to be output as an image signal by inputting one pulse of the clock signal may be different between the first drawing data and the second drawing data.

An image signal corresponding to one dot in the first drawing data is output to the first sub display device 43 by inputting one pulse of the clock signal, and one dot in the second drawing data is input by inputting the next one pulse. The image signal corresponding to is output to the second sub display device 44. In this case, although it takes a long time to complete the output of the image signals for all the dots in the first drawing data and the second drawing data, the output of the image signal to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 43 It is possible to alternately output the image signal to the display device 44.

(32) The number of dots may be different between the first drawing data and the second drawing data. In this case, in a situation where there is a dot for which the output of the image signal is not completed in both the first drawing data and the second drawing data, the output of the image signal to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display are performed. The output of the image signal to the device 44 is alternately performed, and after the output of the image signal of the side having the smaller number of dots of the first drawing data and the second drawing data is completed, the image signal of the side having the larger number of dots is A configuration may be used in which only the output is repeated.

(33) In the configuration in which the target display devices to which the image data to be used are collected and set in one drawing list are all the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44. There is no limitation, and the objects to be collectively set may be the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43, or may be the main display device 41 and the second sub display device 44. The first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 may be configured. In a configuration in which four or more display devices are provided, the image data corresponding to the four or more display devices may be collectively set in one drawing list.

(34) The display order priority data is not limited to the configuration in which the display order priority data is also used as the information for designating the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set in the drawing list. , 44 may be set in the drawing list. In this case, for example, the same display order priority data is provided between the image data group corresponding to the main display device 41, the image data group corresponding to the first sub display device 43, and the image data group corresponding to the second sub display device 44. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which image data for which is set exists. In this configuration, the use order of the image data is preset according to the types of the display devices 41, 43, 44, such as the main display device 41→the first sub display device 43→the second sub display device 44. Even if the same display order priority data exists among the different display devices 41, 43, 44, each image data can be sequentially used.

(35) Display target data and display order data are set in the display control execution target table, and the display order priority data is derived from the display target data and the display order data. Alternatively, the display order priority data may be set in the execution target table for display control. In this case, the processing load can be reduced in that it is not necessary to derive the display order priority data from the display target data and the display order data.

(36) The display contents of the rotation period image 153 are not limited to those in the above-described embodiment, and are arbitrary. For example, the rotation period image 153 includes the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device. The same color display may be performed on the entire display device 44, and a geometric pattern may be displayed on the entire main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44. May be

(37) During the period in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 display an image with vertical and horizontal directionality and the images are displayed. It may be configured to be displayed without following the rotation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 so that the player recognizes that it is displayed on the non-rotating surface. For example, at least one of a character image and a background image is displayed over the entire main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44, and the image indicates the rotation operation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. The display may be continuously displayed in the same range while maintaining the vertical and horizontal directionality regardless of. This makes it difficult for a player who is paying attention to the image to recognize that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

(38) When the sub display devices 43 and 44 slide in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction in front of the main display device 41, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 as a whole are The image may be displayed over the entire length, and may be displayed without following the sliding movement of the sub display devices 43 and 44 so that the player recognizes that the image is displayed on the fixed surface. For example, at least one of a character image and a background image is displayed over the entire main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44, and the image indicates the sliding motion of the sub-display devices 43, 44. The display may be continuously displayed in the same range while maintaining the vertical and horizontal directionality regardless of. This makes it difficult for the player who is paying attention to the image to recognize that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are sliding.

(39) The display period of the image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are performing the displacement operation is not limited to the rotation period in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 perform the rotation operation. For example, the sub display devices 43 and 44 may be configured to continue sliding from the initial position until the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the separation position. As a result, the sub display devices 43 and 44 can be displaced from the initial position to the separated position without the player's knowledge, and the player can be surprised.

(40) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the plurality of displaceable sub-display devices 43 and 44 are provided, and the configuration in which only one is provided or the configuration in which three or more are provided may be employed. ..

(41) The sub display devices 43 and 44 may be configured to be able to make one or more turns in a predetermined direction with the direction in which the display surface of the main display device 41 faces as the rotation axis.

(42) The second operation port 34 is provided in the right side area in the game area PA, and in the high frequency support mode, in the configuration in which the shooting operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area, the high frequency support mode is used. Also in the above, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side may be displayed.

(43) Although the rotation speed of the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 is changed according to the rotation mode of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the rotation speed of the sub-side right hitting notification image 143 is not changed. May be

(44) The abnormality notification image 176 may be displayed in the area where the main display device 41 may face the sub display devices 43 and 44 during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44. .. In this case, it is possible to secure a wide area in which the abnormality notification image 176 can be displayed.

(45) When a notification target event occurs in the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, an abnormality notification corresponding to the notification target event is generated according to the order in which the notification target event occurs, regardless of the priority of the notification target event. The image 176 may be sequentially displayed. Further, instead of the configuration, when a notification target event occurs in the execution period of the displacement display of the sub-display devices 43, 44, the notification target event is selected according to the priority of the notification target event regardless of the occurrence order of the notification target event. The corresponding abnormality notification image 176 may be sequentially displayed.

(46) When a predetermined notification target event occurs in the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event is displayed on the main display device 41 and The display devices 43 and 44 may be configured to return to the initial positions. Thereby, it becomes possible to pay attention to the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the main display device 41.

(47) When a predetermined notification target event occurs in the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event is displayed in the sub display device 43 instead of the main display device 41. , 44 may be displayed. This makes it possible to make the abnormality notification image 176 stand out.

(48) Only 3D images using 3D image data may be displayed. In this case, all of the image data corresponding to each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 is arranged in a common world coordinate system, and drawing for the main display device 41 is performed from that state. The data, the drawing data for the first sub display device 43, and the drawing data for the second sub display device 44 may be created separately. As a result, it is not necessary to individually prepare the world coordinate system corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load.

(49) Although the camera (viewpoint) is individually set for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system, instead of this, a single image is set for all image data arranged in the world coordinate system. The configuration may be such that the cameras are commonly set. Further, the color information such as texture mapping may be set before projection.

(50) Instead of the configuration in which the distribution control board 71 controls the effect control device 80 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60, the effect control is performed based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 80 may control the distribution control board 71. Further, instead of the configuration in which the distribution control board 71 and the effect control device 80 are separately provided, the configuration may be such that these are provided as one control device, and one of these functions is the main control device 60. May be integrated, or both of these functions may be integrated in main controller 60.

(51) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a big hit is generated, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and sparrow balls.

Also, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, provided with a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

Further, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame to be openable and closable includes a storage part and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage part are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined so that the reels start to rotate.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above-described embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in brackets or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. First storage means (memory module 83) for storing information in advance,
Second storage means (VRAM86) for storing the information read from the first storage means,
Storage specifying means (function of executing the processing of step S1007 and step S1008 in the advance transfer control unit 94) for specifying whether or not the predetermined information that is the target of the transfer instruction is stored in the second storage means;
When the storage specifying unit specifies that the predetermined information is not stored in the second storage unit, the predetermined information is transferred from the first storage unit and the predetermined information is stored in the second storage unit. If it is specified by the storage specifying unit that the predetermined information is transferred, the transfer executing unit that does not transfer the predetermined information from the first storing unit (the processes of step S1009 and step S1010 in the advance transfer control unit 94 are executed). Function),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic A1, since the information stored in advance in the first storage means is transferred to the second storage means, when the information is used, the second storage means is not read directly from the first storage means. Just read from. In this case, when the predetermined information is the target of the transfer instruction and the predetermined information is not stored in the second storage unit, the predetermined information is read from the first storage unit to the second storage unit, If the predetermined information is already stored in the second storage means, the predetermined information is not transferred from the first storage means. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined information from being further transferred from the first storage means even though the predetermined information is already stored in the second storage means. It is possible to improve the efficiency of reading information from the.

Feature A2. When the storage specifying unit specifies that the predetermined information is stored in the second storage unit, and the storage area of the second storage unit in which the predetermined information is stored is the transfer instruction. When the storage area is a storage area different from the storage area specified as the storage area, the storage area stores the predetermined information in the storage area using the predetermined information stored in the separate storage area. The gaming machine according to feature A1, which is provided with an executing unit (a function of executing the process of step S1011 in the advance transfer control unit 94).

According to the characteristic A2, when the transfer instruction is issued with respect to the predetermined information already read in the second storage means, the predetermined information is copied between the storage areas of the second storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store the predetermined information in the storage area designated as the transfer instruction while eliminating the need for further reading the predetermined information from the first storage means.

Features A3. The storage specifying unit uses a search information group (search table 125) in which a correspondence relationship between the type of the storage area of the second storage unit and the type of information stored in the storage area is set. The gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2, which specifies whether or not the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means.

According to the characteristic A3, since the search information group is provided, it is possible to efficiently specify whether or not the predetermined information that is the target of the transfer instruction has already been read out to the second storage unit. It will be possible.

Features A4. When the predetermined information is stored in the storage area of the storage destination designated by the transfer instruction in the second storage means, the correspondence relationship between the type of the storage area of the storage destination and the type of the predetermined information is newly created. The game according to the feature A3, which is provided with a content updating unit (a function of executing the process of step S1012 in the advance transfer control unit 94) for updating the content of the search information group so as to be set to Machine.

According to the characteristic A4, when the information is transferred to the storage area of the second storage means, the contents of the search information group are updated so that the correspondence between the storage area and the information is reflected. It As a result, the contents of the search information group can be made to correspond to the latest storage state of the second storage means.

Features A5. In the transfer instruction, specification information (address ID) for specifying the area in which the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means is provided as information for causing the transfer execution means to specify the type of the predetermined information. Provided,
In the search information group, the specifying information or information included in the specifying information is set as information for specifying the type of the predetermined information, and the game according to the characteristic A3 or A4. Machine.

According to the characteristic A5, the information provided by the transfer instruction is set in the search information group. Thus, when the predetermined information that is the target of the transfer instruction is stored in the second storage means by using the search information group, the information provided in the transfer instruction is displayed. It can be used as it is. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when the identification is performed.

Features A6. The specifying information includes information corresponding to a start address of an area where the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein information corresponding to the start address is set as information for identifying the type of the predetermined information in the search information group.

According to the characteristic A6, since the information for identifying the type of the predetermined information in the search information group is the information corresponding to the start address, all addresses in the area in which the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means It is possible to suppress the amount of information for specifying the type of the predetermined information in the search information group as compared with the configuration in which the information corresponding to is included, and the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means. It is possible to reduce the processing load when referring to the search information group in order to specify whether or not the search information group is present.

Features A7. The predetermined information is information stored in a plurality of storage areas in the second storage means,
The type information set to identify the type of the storage area in the search information group is identification information for identifying the plurality of storage areas as a group of storage areas. A gaming machine according to any one of A to A6.

According to the characteristic A7, since the plurality of storage areas in the second storage means are specified as a group of storage areas by using the identification information, it is possible to suppress the amount of type information in the search information group. Becomes

Feature A8. The second storage means has a plurality of storage areas,
Information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas in accordance with a predetermined order, and the storage processing of the information in the storage area of the last order is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein information is stored in the area.

According to the characteristic A8, since the storage area of the second storage means loops as an execution target of the storage processing, the storage capacity of the second storage means can be made appropriate. Further, since the plurality of storage areas of the second storage means are sequentially subjected to the storage processing in accordance with a predetermined order, the processing configuration for specifying the storage area to be the storage processing execution target is simplified. It becomes possible.

Features A9. The first storage unit stores at least arbitrary information (image data for start of fluctuation) used by the control unit when a predetermined event that can occur at an arbitrary timing occurs in at least a predetermined situation,
In the situation where the arbitrary information is stored in the predetermined storage area of the second storage means, the arbitrary information is stored in the predetermined storage area of the second storage means so that the state in which the arbitrary information is stored in the second storage means is maintained in the predetermined situation. The second storage means is provided with a storage maintaining means (a function of executing the processing of steps S903 to S906 in the effect CPU 82) to be stored in the storage area that is the execution target of the storage processing. The gaming machine according to feature A8.

According to the characteristic A9, even if the storage area of the second storage unit is configured to loop as the execution target of the storage process, the arbitrary information will continue to be stored in the second storage unit in a predetermined situation. This makes it possible to allow the arbitrary information to be already read in the second storage means at the timing of occurrence of the predetermined event, and from the first storage means to the second storage means at the timing of occurrence of the predetermined event. Does not require the transfer of any optional information. In particular, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated storage area for storing arbitrary information in the second storage means, the degree of freedom in using the storage area of the second storage means is increased. To be

Feature A10. The storage maintaining unit uses the arbitrary information stored in the predetermined storage region to store the arbitrary information in a storage region of the second storage unit that is the execution target of the storage process. The gaming machine described in Feature A9.

According to the characteristic A10, it is not necessary to periodically read the arbitrary information from the first storage means in order to keep the arbitrary information stored in the second storage means in a predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the arbitrary information continuously stored in the second storage means in a predetermined situation while improving the information reading efficiency.

Feature A11. The second storage means has a faster reading speed than the first reading means.
The gaming machine is provided with a control unit (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) that executes control using the information transferred to the second storage unit, of the features A1 to A10. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the characteristic A11, the information is read out to the second storage means in which the speed required for reading out the information is faster than that in the case where the information is read out from the first storage means, and the control means can control using the read information By being executed, the time required for the control means to read the information can be shortened. In this case, since the configuration described in the above characteristic A1 and the like is provided, it is possible to preferably transfer the information to the second storage unit.

For any one of the features A1 to A11, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, the features I1 to I9, the features J1 to J3, and the features K1 to K8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. First storage means (memory module 83) for storing control information in advance,
Second storage means (VRAM86) for storing the control information read from the first storage means;
Instruction control means (production CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list),
Transfer execution means (preliminary transfer control unit 94) for causing the control information specified in the instruction information to be in a state of being read into the second storage means;
Control execution means (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) for executing control using the control information in accordance with the instruction information;
Equipped with
Storage source information (address ID) for specifying an area in which the control information is stored in the first storage means is set in the instruction information provided from the instruction control means,
The transfer execution means, when the control information specified in the instruction information is read into the second storage means by executing a transfer process using the storage source information, (2) Set storage destination information (identification information) for specifying the area in which the control information is read in the storage means to the instruction information,
The control execution unit uses the instruction information after the storage destination information is set by the transfer execution unit, and the control information specified in the instruction information is read out. A gaming machine characterized by reading the control information from a storage area of a storage means.

According to the characteristic B1, when the control information is transferred to the second storage means according to the storage source information set in the instruction information, the area for storing the control information in the second storage means is specified. The storage destination information is set in the instruction information. Accordingly, it is not necessary to set both the storage source information and the storage destination information in the instruction information from the beginning, so that the information amount of the instruction information transmitted from the instruction control unit can be suppressed. Further, when the control information is actually transferred to the second storage means, the information corresponding to the area of the second storage means to which the control information is transferred is set as the storage destination information in the instruction information. It is possible to improve the reliability of the content of the destination information.

Feature B2. The game machine according to feature B1, wherein the transfer executing means sets the storage destination information so as to overwrite the storage source information of the instruction information.

According to the feature B2, when the control information is transferred in accordance with the storage source information of the instruction information, the storage destination information corresponding to the area of the second storage unit to which the control information is transferred is the storage source information. The information is overwritten and set in the instruction information. This makes it possible to suppress the information amount of the instruction information provided to the control execution means after the transfer of the control information is completed.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the storage destination information has a smaller amount of information than the storage source information.

According to the feature B3, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the transfer execution unit overwrites the storage source information with the storage destination information.

Feature B4. A storage area for storing the instruction information provided from the instruction control means (a storage area 121 for transfer), and a storage area for storing the instruction information for which the setting of the storage destination information by the transfer executing means is completed ( The game machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3, characterized in that the post-transfer storage area 122) is distinguished from the post-transfer storage region 122).

According to the feature B4, the storage area in which the instruction information provided by the instruction control unit and the instruction information in which the control information has been transferred and the storage destination information is set are clearly distinguished from each other. It is possible to clearly distinguish these pieces of instruction information.

Feature B5. As the control information, there is predetermined control information (decoded image data) that is not a read target to the second storage means,
In the case where the predetermined control information is set in the instruction information, the transfer execution means stores the predetermined control information in the second storage means as processing and information corresponding to the predetermined control information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that neither of the processes of setting storage destination information in the instruction information is executed.

According to the feature B5, the storage destination information is not set in the instruction information in the transfer execution means for the predetermined control information that is not the read target to the second storage means, so the storage destination information is set in the transfer execution means. It is possible to prevent it from being unnecessarily executed in.

Feature B6. The second storage means has a plurality of storage areas,
Information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order,
The transfer execution means is
When a transfer process using the storage source information in which the execution order of the transfer process is a predetermined order in the instruction information is executed, the control information that is the execution target of the transfer process in the second storage unit Means for setting information corresponding to the area read out as the storage destination information in the instruction information (function of executing the processing of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94);
When a transfer process using the storage source information is executed, in which the execution order of the transfer process is the next order in the instruction information, the second storage unit corresponds to the predetermined order. Means for setting, as the storage destination information, information corresponding to the difference in address of the area in which the control information is read corresponding to the next order with respect to the area in which the control information is read, as the storage destination information. (Function of executing the processing of step S1103 in the advance transfer control unit 94),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided.

According to the characteristic B6, in the instruction information, the information corresponding to the address difference is set as the storage destination information for the control information in which the execution order of the transfer process is the next order to the predetermined order. It is possible to suppress the amount of storage destination information set in the instruction information.

Feature B7. The predetermined control information is stored in a plurality of storage areas in the second storage means,
When the predetermined control information is read into the plurality of storage areas by executing a transfer process using the storage source information, the transfer execution means sets the plurality of storage areas as a group. A feature B1 to a feature including a unit (a function of executing the process of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94) that sets identification information for identifying a storage area in the instruction information as the storage destination information. The gaming machine according to any one of B6.

According to the feature B7, since the plurality of storage areas in the second storage means are identified as a group of storage areas by using the identification information, the amount of storage destination information set in the instruction information can be suppressed. Is possible.

For any one of the features B1 to B7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, the features I1 to I9, the features J1 to J3, and the features K1 to K8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the characteristic group A and the characteristic group B, the following problems can be solved.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are provided with a control element such as a CPU and a read-only storage element such as a ROM, and a series of games based on the processing being executed by the control element according to a program read from the read-only storage element. Is controlled. It is also known that a control element and a read-only memory element are integrated into one chip.

Further, a configuration using a control element for performing sound output control and display control is also known. In this case, the operation of the controlled device is controlled based on the processing performed by the control element according to the data read from the read-only storage element.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably read the information from the storage means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Display means for displaying an image (main display device 41, first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44),
Image information storage means (memory module 83) for storing image data in advance;
An instruction control means (production CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of the image displayed on the display means,
Display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means based on using the image data in accordance with the content instructed in the instruction information;
Equipped with
The instruction control means is provided with a plurality of providing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S907 to S921 in the effect CPU 82) for providing a plurality of the instruction information in order to display an image at one update timing on the display means. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the characteristic C1, a plurality of pieces of instruction information may be provided to display the image at one update timing. As a result, the information amount of one piece of instruction information provided from the instruction control means becomes extremely large, or various pieces of information are mixed in one piece of instruction information, and the processing load of the display control means increases. It is possible to preferably provide the instruction information while suppressing the occurrence of events such as loss.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the plurality of providing units sets the image data included in the first type and the image data included in the second type as usage targets in the different instruction information. ..

According to the characteristic C2, the use instruction information of the image data is set to the different instruction information according to the type of the image data. With this, the display control means may execute the process corresponding to the type of the instruction information, and the type of the image data to be used in the instruction information is identified as the use target. The display control means does not need to individually perform the processing for each unit of image data. Therefore, the processing load of the display control means can be reduced.

Feature C3. The display control means,
First display control means (3D control section 97) for displaying an image on the display means using data created based on arranging three-dimensional data as the image data in a virtual three-dimensional space,
A second display control unit (2D control unit 96) for displaying an image on the display unit using two-dimensional data that is not the three-dimensional data;
Equipped with
The image data included in the first type is data used by the first display control unit, and the image data included in the second type is data used by the second display control unit. The gaming machine described in Feature C2.

The display control means performs different processing depending on whether the image is displayed using the image data of the three-dimensional data or the image is displayed using the image data of the two-dimensional data. In this case, according to the characteristic C3, since the image data of the three-dimensional data and the image data of the two-dimensional data are not set in one instruction information in a mixed manner, the display control means sets the three-dimensional data and It becomes possible to discriminate which of the two-dimensional data corresponds to the instruction information unit. Therefore, the processing load of the display control means can be reduced.

Feature C4. The instruction control means causes the display means to display the image at the one update timing when the predetermined number or more of the image data is used to display the image at the one update timing on the display means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3, characterized in that the number of the instruction information to be provided is increased more than when the image data of less than a predetermined number is used.

According to the characteristic C4, it is possible to prevent the number of pieces of image data set to be used in one piece of instruction information from becoming extremely large. As a result, the information amount of one piece of instruction information provided from the instruction control means can be suppressed to some extent, and the transmission period of one piece of instruction information can be prevented from becoming extremely long. ..

Feature C5. When the plurality of providing means provides a plurality of the instruction information for displaying an image at one update timing on the display means, the plurality of instruction information are collectively used to display the image at one update timing. Aggregated information setting means for setting information indicating that the information is to be stored (a function of executing the processing of steps S912 and S918 in the effect CPU 82 in the first embodiment, a step in the effect CPU 82 in the fourth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of S2506 to step S2507 and step S2513 to step S2514.

According to the characteristic C5, even when a plurality of pieces of instruction information are provided to display an image at one update timing, the display control means indicates that the plurality of pieces of instruction information are collectively used. Information for enabling identification is set by the instruction control means. This makes it possible for the display control means to recognize that the plurality of pieces of instruction information are for displaying an image at one update timing.

Feature C6. The display control means, when the first instruction information and the second instruction information are provided as the instruction information for displaying an image at one update timing on the display means, the first instruction information and the second instruction information. The game according to any one of the features C1 to C5, which is provided with an aggregating unit (a function of executing the process of step S2607 in the advance transfer control unit 94) that aggregates information and one instruction information. Machine.

According to the characteristic C6, even if a plurality of instruction information is provided to the display control means in order to display an image at one update timing, the display control means aggregates the plurality of instruction information into one instruction information. To be done. This eliminates the need to refer to a plurality of instruction information when the display control unit executes the display control according to the instruction information.

Feature C7. The display control unit includes a transfer execution unit (advance transfer control unit 94) that causes the image data specified in the instruction information to be in a state of being read by the read storage unit (VRAM86),
The aggregating unit converts the first instruction information and the second instruction information into one instruction information when the first instruction information and the second instruction information are subject to transfer processing by the transfer executing unit. The gaming machine according to feature C6, which is characterized by being aggregated.

According to the characteristic C7, the image data specified in the instruction information is read out to the read-out storage means in advance, so that it is possible to increase the processing speed when the image data is used in the display control means. In this case, since the plurality of instruction information for displaying the image at one update timing is aggregated in accordance with the transfer processing performed by the transfer execution unit, a plurality of instructions for the advance transfer may be given. It can also be used as an opportunity to aggregate information.

Feature C8. The display control means includes a plurality of instruction information storage areas (first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t before transfer) for storing the instruction information provided by the instruction control means,
When a plurality of the instruction information is provided to display an image at one update timing on the display means, the plurality of the instruction information are sequentially stored in the plurality of instruction information storage areas having continuous addresses. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C7.

According to the characteristic C8, since the plurality of instruction information for displaying the image at one update timing is stored in the instruction information storage area having continuous addresses, the processing configuration for reading the plurality of instruction information is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

For any one of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, the features I1 to I9, the features J1 to J3, and the features K1 to K8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the characteristic group C, the following problems can be solved.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. First storage means (memory module 83) for storing information in advance,
Second storage means (VRAM86) for storing the information read from the first storage means,
Control means (performance LSI 85) for executing control using the information read to the second storage means;
Equipped with
A plurality of storage areas are provided in the second storage means, and address information is set in each of the plurality of storage areas,
The control means uses aggregate designation information (index No or identification information) that is a part of the storage area provided in the second storage means and collectively designates the plurality of storage areas. And, it is possible to read information from the plurality of storage areas.

According to the feature D1, it is possible to collectively read information from a plurality of storage areas corresponding to the aggregation designation information by using the aggregation designation information. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of information required to specify the storage area from which information is to be read, as compared with the case where the address information is specified for each of the plurality of storage areas and the information is read from the plurality of storage areas. Becomes

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the corresponding address information is continuous in the storage area that is designated by being aggregated by the aggregation designation information.

According to the feature D2, it is possible to prevent the correspondence relationship between the aggregate designation information and the storage area designated thereby from becoming complicated.

Feature D3. The control means uses the identification information different from the address information set corresponding to a part of the storage areas of the plurality of storage areas corresponding to the aggregation designation information to store the part of the storage area. The gaming machine described in the feature D1 or D2, wherein information can be read from the area.

According to the characteristic D3, even when a plurality of storage areas are collectively designated using the aggregate designation information, it is possible to read information from some of the plurality of storage areas. It will be possible.

Feature D4. The control means is
Reading means (transfer controller 92) for reading information from the storage area corresponding to the aggregation designation information in the second storage means;
A control execution unit (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) for instructing the reading unit to read information and executing control using the information read by the reading unit;
Equipped with
The reading unit uses the correspondence information group (index table 128) in which the correspondence between the aggregation designation information and the address information is set to identify the storage area corresponding to the read instruction from the control execution unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3.

According to the characteristic D4, since the correspondence information group is used, it is possible to efficiently specify the type of storage area corresponding to the aggregate designation information in the reading unit.

Feature D5. The control unit includes a changing unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S2401 to S2403 in the pre-transfer control unit 94) capable of changing the relationship between the aggregation designation information and the plurality of storage areas. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D4.

According to the feature D5, the relationship between the aggregation designation information and the plurality of storage areas can be changed as necessary, so that the aggregation designation of the storage areas using the aggregation designation information can be flexibly used. Becomes

Feature D6. The control means uses first aggregate designation information (index No. 1) for collectively designating a plurality of storage areas, which is a part of the storage area provided in the second storage means. It is possible to read information from the plurality of storage areas, and to collectively specify the plurality of storage areas that are a part of the storage areas provided in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the information can be read from the plurality of storage areas by using the second aggregation designation information (index No. 2).

According to the characteristic D6, it becomes possible to distinguish the storage area of the second storage means into a plurality of aggregated areas. Thereby, it is possible to set a plurality of aggregation areas according to the purpose.

Feature D7. The feature D6 is characterized in that it is possible to make the number of the storage areas designated by the first aggregation designation information different from the number of the storage areas designated by the second aggregation designation information. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic D7, the degree of freedom in setting each aggregation region can be increased in the configuration in which a plurality of aggregation regions can be set according to the purpose.

For any one of the features D1 to D7, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, the features I1 to I9, the features J1 to J3, and the features K1 to K8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the characteristic group D, the following problems can be solved.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are provided with a control element such as a CPU and a read-only storage element such as a ROM, and a series of games based on the processing being executed by the control element according to a program read from the read-only storage element. Is controlled. It is also known that a control element and a read-only memory element are integrated into one chip.

Further, a configuration using a control element for performing sound output control and display control is also known. In this case, the operation of the controlled device is controlled based on the processing performed by the control element according to the data read from the read-only storage element.

Here, in the gaming machine as exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably read the information from the storage means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means for displaying an image (main display device 41, first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44),
Image information storage means (memory module 83) for storing image data in advance;
An instruction control means (production CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of the image displayed on the display means,
Display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means based on using the image data in accordance with the content instructed in the instruction information;
Equipped with
The display control means,
First control means (preliminary transfer control section 94) for executing first control necessary for displaying an image on the display means in accordance with predetermined instruction information provided by the instruction control means,
Second control means (2D control section 96, 3D control section 97) that executes second control necessary for displaying an image on the display means according to the predetermined instruction information;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic E1, the control means for executing the first control according to the predetermined instruction information and the control means for executing the second control according to the predetermined instruction information are separately provided for the first control means and the second control means. Has been. This makes it possible to disperse the processing load as compared with a configuration in which one control unit executes both the first control and the second control collectively.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the second control means executes the second control in accordance with the predetermined instruction information after the first control means has become an execution target of the first control. ..

According to the characteristic E2, the predetermined instruction information is sequentially used in the first control means and the second control means. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects without providing a plurality of identical instruction information from the instruction control means.

Feature E3. A read storage unit (VRAM86) for storing the image data read from the image information storage unit;
The first control unit is configured to bring the image data set as a use target in the predetermined instruction information into a state in which the image data is read by the read storage unit.
The second control means causes the display means to display an image based on using the image data read out to the read-out storage means in accordance with the content instructed in the predetermined instruction information. The gaming machine described in the feature E1 or E2.

According to the characteristic E3, the control for reading the image data according to the predetermined instruction information and reading the image data into the storage unit is performed by the first control unit, and the control for displaying the image by using the image data according to the predetermined instruction information is the second control. Done by means. In this case, in the configuration in which the processing load is distributed between the first control unit and the second control unit, the control content executed by each of the first control unit and the second control unit can be clearly different. ..

Feature E4. The first control unit is configured to display the image on the display unit according to the predetermined instruction information for displaying an image at a predetermined update timing by the second control unit, in a situation where the predetermined control is performed. Feature E3, characterized in that the image data is read into the read storage means in accordance with the predetermined instruction information for displaying an image at an update timing after the update timing of Game machine.

According to the feature E4, the period during which the process for displaying the image is executed by the second control unit is used, and the image data to be used thereafter is read out and stored by the control by the first control unit independent of the period. It is possible to transfer to the means in advance.

Feature E5. Storage source information (address ID) for specifying an area in which the image data is stored in the image information storage means is set in the instruction information provided from the instruction control means,
The first control means, when the image data specified in the instruction information has been read by the read storage means by executing a transfer process using the storage source information, the read storage Storage destination information (identification information) for specifying the area from which the image data is read by the means,
The second control unit uses the instruction information after the storage destination information is set by the first control unit, and the image data designated in the instruction information is read out. The gaming machine described in the feature E3 or E4, wherein the image data is read from the storage area of the storage means.

According to the characteristic E5, when the image data is transferred to the read storage means according to the storage source information set in the instruction information, the storage destination information for specifying the area in which the image data is stored in the read storage means is provided. It is set in the instruction information. Accordingly, it is not necessary to set both the storage source information and the storage destination information in the instruction information from the beginning, so that the information amount of the instruction information transmitted from the instruction control unit can be suppressed. Further, when the image data is actually transferred to the read storage means, the information corresponding to the area of the read storage means to which the image data was transferred is set in the instruction information as the storage destination information. It is possible to increase the reliability of.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the first control means sets the storage destination information so as to overwrite the storage source information of the instruction information.

According to the characteristic E6, when the image data is transferred according to the storage source information of the instruction information, the storage destination information corresponding to the area of the read storage means to which the image data is transferred overwrites the storage source information. And set in the instruction information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of instruction information provided to the second control means after the transfer of the control information is completed.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to feature E6, wherein the storage destination information has a smaller amount of information than the storage source information.

According to the feature E7, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the storage destination information is overwritten on the storage source information in the first control unit.

Feature E8. A storage area for storing the instruction information provided from the instruction control means (a storage area 121 for transfer), and a storage area for storing the instruction information for which the setting of the storage destination information by the first control means is completed The game machine according to any one of features E5 to E7, characterized in that the (post-transfer storage area 122) is distinguished.

According to the feature E8, the storage area in which the instruction information provided from the instruction control unit and the instruction information in which the transfer of the image data is completed and the storage destination information is set are stored are clearly distinguished, It is possible to clearly distinguish these pieces of instruction information.

Feature E9. As the image data, there is predetermined image data (decoded image data) that is not a read target to the read storage unit,
When the predetermined image data is set to be used in the instruction information, the first control unit processes the predetermined image data into the read storage unit and stores the predetermined image data as information corresponding to the predetermined image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E8, characterized in that neither of the processes of setting storage destination information in the instruction information is executed.

According to the feature E9, since the storage destination information is not set in the instruction information in the first control means for the predetermined image data that is not the read target to the read storage means, the storage destination information is set in the first control means. It is possible to prevent it from being unnecessarily executed in.

Feature E10. The read storage means has a plurality of storage areas,
Information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order,
The first control means is
When a transfer process using the storage source information in which the execution order of the transfer process is a predetermined order in the instruction information is executed, the image data that is the execution target of the transfer process is read by the read storage unit. Means for setting information corresponding to the issued area as the storage destination information in the instruction information (function of executing the processing of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94);
In the instruction information, when the transfer process using the storage source information is executed, which is the next order to the predetermined order of the transfer process, the read storage means corresponds to the predetermined order. Means for setting information corresponding to the address difference of the area in which the image data is read corresponding to the next order with respect to the area in which the image data is read as the storage destination information in the instruction information (pre-transfer) A function of executing the process of step S1103 in the control unit 94),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E5 to E9, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E10, the image data whose execution order of the transfer process is the next order in the instruction information is set to the information corresponding to the address difference as the storage destination information for the image data. It is possible to reduce the amount of storage destination information set in the instruction information.

Feature E11. The specific image data is stored in a plurality of storage areas in the read storage means,
The first control means, when the specific image data is read into the plurality of storage areas by executing a transfer process using the storage source information, stores the plurality of storage areas in a group. Features E5 to E10 characterized by including a unit (a function of executing the process of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94) that sets identification information for identifying an area as the storage destination information in the instruction information. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the characteristic E11, since the plurality of storage areas in the read storage means are specified as a group of storage areas by using the identification information, the information amount of the storage destination information set in the instruction information can be suppressed. It will be possible.

For any one of the features E1 to E11, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, the features I1 to I9, the features J1 to J3, and the features K1 to K8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Display means for displaying an image (main display device 41, first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44),
An image information storage unit (memory module 83) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means using the image data;
Equipped with
In the image information storage means, as the moving image data in which a plurality of decoded image data is created by performing the decoding process, reference data (I) serving as a reference when the decoded image data is created in the decoding process. Picture data) and special moving picture data (special moving picture data 185) that does not include difference data (B picture data, P picture data) capable of providing a difference with respect to the reference data when the decoding process is executed. ) Is stored in the game machine.

According to the feature F1, since the special moving image data that includes the reference data but does not include the difference data is provided, the decoded image data that is created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data is It is possible to obtain a higher image quality than the decoded image data created by performing the decoding process on the moving image data. That is, according to the present configuration, it is possible to handle image data having the same image quality as normal still image data as moving image data. As a result, it is possible to use image data having the same image quality as the normal still image data without using the area for reading the normal still image data.

Feature F2. The game machine according to Feature F1, wherein the special moving image data includes a plurality of the reference data.

According to the feature F2, by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data, it is possible to create a plurality of image data having the same image quality as the normal still image data.

Feature F3. The game according to the feature F2, wherein a plurality of decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is used in accordance with a use order defined in the special moving image data. Machine.

According to the feature F3, when using a plurality of decoded image data created from special moving image data, it is not necessary to set the use order separately from the special moving image data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for setting the order in which the image data is used, as compared with a configuration in which the decoded image data is stored in the image information storage means in advance as normal still image data.

Feature F4. A decoding unit (moving picture decoder 95) for executing the decoding process on the special moving image data,
The decoding means is configured to perform the processing for displaying the image at the update timing earlier than the update timing at which the image using the decoded image data is displayed, in the situation that the display control means is executing the special moving image. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the decoding process is performed on data.

According to the feature F4, during the period in which the processing for displaying an image using other image data is being performed by the display control means, the special moving image is provided by the decoding means provided separately from the display control means. Image data decoding processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period during which the decoding process is being performed from being the image display waiting period while preventing the processing load of the display control unit from increasing.

Feature F5. The image information storage means stores auxiliary image data in association with the special moving image data,
The gaming machine includes a decoding unit (moving picture decoder 95) that executes the decoding process on the special image data,
The decoding means performs the decoding processing on the special moving image data in a situation where the display control means is executing processing for displaying an image using the attached image data. The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F4.

According to the feature F5, since the decoding process of the special moving image data is executed in the situation where the process for displaying the image using the attached image data corresponding to the special moving image data is executed, the special moving image data It is possible to perform the decoding process of the special moving image data by utilizing the period in which the process for displaying the image corresponding to is executed.

Feature F6. The attached image data displays an image corresponding to the update timing immediately before the image displayed using the decoded image data to be used first among the decoded image data created from the special moving image data. The game machine according to feature F5, which is image data for causing the game machine to perform.

According to the feature F6, the special moving image data is displayed using the attached image data in a configuration in which the decoding process of the special moving image data is executed during the period in which the process for displaying the image using the attached image data is executed. It is possible to ensure the continuity between the image displayed and the image displayed using the decoded image data.

Feature F7. The display control unit executes a predetermined process on predetermined image data stored in the image information storage unit to display an image corresponding to the predetermined image data (a step S810 in the 3D control unit 97). Function to execute the process of
When displaying an image corresponding to the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data, the predetermined process is executed by the predetermined process execution means on the decoded image data. Configuration,
When the display control unit uses the image data, the image data is read from the image information storage unit to the read storage unit (VRAM 86, register 93).
The read storage means is provided with a first read area (VRAM 86) in which the predetermined image data is stored and a second read area (register 93) in which the decoded image data is read. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6.

According to the feature F7, when the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is not directly used from the image information storage means but is used after being read once to the reading storage means. Therefore, by reading the image data into the read storage means in advance, when the display control means uses the image data, the image data can be used immediately. Further, the read-out storage means is provided with a first read-out area from which predetermined image data is read out and a second read-out area from which decoded image data of special moving image data is read out. The area for reading is set, and when the image data is used in the display control means, the area can be designated according to the type of the image data.

In this case, the special image data having the configuration of the characteristic F1 and not including the difference data is stored in the image information storage means. As a result, the special image data is read not in the first read area but in the second read area, so that it is not necessary to secure an area for using the special image data in the first read area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature F8. The image information storage means stores a plurality of types of the predetermined image data,
The gaming machine is
First read execution means for reading all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data into the first read area at a predetermined read timing;
In a situation where the decoded image data corresponding to moving image data other than the special moving image data is stored in the second read area, the decoded image data corresponding to the special moving image data is stored in the second read area. In this case, second read execution means for overwriting the decoded image data already stored in the second read area with the decoded image data,
A gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F8, all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read into the first read area, so that it is not necessary to read the predetermined image data as needed. On the other hand, the decoded image data is read into the second read area as needed, and when new decoded image data is created, the decoded image data is overwritten in the second read area. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the second read area. In this case, the special image data having the configuration of the characteristic F1 and not including the difference data is stored in the image information storage means. As a result, the special image data is read not in the first read area but in the second read area, so that it is not necessary to secure an area for using the special image data in the first read area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature F9. The game machine according to feature F8, wherein the first read execution means reads all of the plurality of types of the predetermined image data into the first read area when supply of operating power is started.

According to the feature F9, it is possible to cause a state in which all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data have been read into the first read area at an early stage.

Feature F10. Decoded image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is texture data used for displaying a three-dimensional image. The game machine described.

According to the feature F10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described when the texture data is used.

For any one of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, the features I1 to I9, the features J1 to J3, and the features K1 to K8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. Display means (first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44) for displaying an image,
Image information storage means (memory module 83) for storing image data in advance;
Drawing data is created based on the setting of the image data in the setting storage means (the first sub frame area 117 for the sub, the second frame area 118 for the sub), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is displayed on the display means. Display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means based on the output;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display means includes a first display means (first sub display device 43) and a second display means (second sub display device 44),
The display control means creates first drawing data for displaying an image on the first display means in a partial region of the setting storage means, and a first display data for displaying the image on the second display means. 2 Aggregation setting means for setting drawing data in another area of the setting storage means (function of executing drawing processing in the drawing area for sub-display in the 2D control unit 96 in the first embodiment, second embodiment In the form, a game machine having a function of executing drawing data combination processing for sub-display in the 3D control unit 97.

According to the feature G1, the first drawing data for displaying the image on the first display means and the second drawing data for displaying the image on the second display means are created in the same setting storage means. As a result, even if there are a plurality of display means, it is possible to reduce the number of setting storage means, simplifying the hardware configuration for accessing the setting storage means, and displaying images on the plurality of display means. Can be realized.

Features G2. A partial area of the setting storage means in which the first drawing data is created is defined as a first setting area (area of odd line), and the setting storage means in which the second drawing data is created The other area is defined as a second setting area (area of an even line). The gaming machine according to the characteristic G1.

According to the characteristic G2, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage unit, the area in which the first drawing data is set is fixed in the setting storage unit. At the same time, the area in which the second drawing data is set is fixed in the setting storage means. As a result, it is not necessary to allocate an area in the setting storage unit each time the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Features G3. First drawing partial data forming a part of the first drawing data exists between a plurality of second drawing partial data forming a part of the second drawing data, and the second drawing partial data includes a plurality of the second drawing partial data. The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the arrangement order of the data in the setting storage means is set so as to exist between the first drawing partial data.

According to the characteristic G3, in the configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the first drawing data and the second drawing data are respectively stored in the setting storage means as a whole. It becomes possible to disperse and set to.

Features G4. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the first drawing portion data and the second drawing portion data are alternately arranged in a data arrangement order of at least a predetermined direction in the setting storage means.

According to the feature G4, the first drawing part data and the second drawing part data are arranged alternately, so that each drawing part data is only output target of the image signal in the order arranged in the predetermined direction. It is possible to alternately output the image signal to the first display means and the second display means.

Features G5. Any one of the characteristics G1 to G4 characterized in that the aggregation setting means causes both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to be set in the setting storage means. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic G5, in the configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the period for creating the first drawing data and the period for creating the second drawing data are It is possible to overlap.

Features G6. The aggregation setting unit is configured to set both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to be used at the same update timing to the state set in the setting storage unit. The gaming machine described in G5.

In the feature G6, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, both images of the first display means and the second display means are updated at one update timing. It becomes possible to do.

Features G7. The display control means, on the basis of one occurrence of a signal output trigger, the image signal corresponding to the first drawing unit data forming a part of the first drawing data and a part of the second drawing data. Of the characteristics G1 to G6, characterized in that the apparatus further comprises signal output means (function of executing signal output processing in the second display circuit 99) for outputting the image signal corresponding to the second drawing unit data constituting The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature G7, both the output of the image signal to the first display means and the output of the image signal to the second display means are performed based on the occurrence of the signal output trigger once. Thus, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the image update on the first display means and the image update on the second display means are started at the same time. It becomes possible to proceed at the same time.

Features G8. The game according to the feature G7, wherein the first drawing unit data is data of a minimum unit in the first drawing data, and the second drawing unit data is data of a minimum unit in the second drawing data. Machine.

According to the feature G8, the images are output in the configuration in which both the output of the image signal to the first display unit and the output of the image signal to the second display unit are performed based on the occurrence of one signal output trigger. Since the data for which the signal is output is the minimum unit of data, it is possible to prevent the execution period of the image signal output process for one signal output trigger from becoming extremely long.

Feature G 9.1 The first drawing unit data and the second drawing unit data that are output targets of the image signal at the signal output trigger of one time are set to be adjacent to each other in the data arrangement order in the setting storage means. The gaming machine described in the feature G7 or G8.

According to the feature G9, only the adjacent drawing unit data in the setting storage unit is set as the output target of the image signal for one signal output trigger, and the first display unit is displayed in response to the occurrence of one signal output trigger. It is possible to perform both the output of the image signal and the output of the image signal to the second display means.

Feature G10. The first drawing data is created by using the image data read from the image information storage means to create the first drawing data,
The second drawing data is created by using the image data read from the image information storage means to create the second drawing data, according to any one of features G1 to G9. Game machine.

According to the characteristic G10, the first drawing data is individually created by using the image data, and the second drawing data is individually created by using the image data. Accordingly, it is not necessary to store in advance the image data for simultaneously creating both the first drawing data and the second drawing data in the image information storage means.

For any one of the features G1 to G10, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, the features I1 to I9, the features J1 to J3, and the features K1 to K8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Features H1. Display means for displaying an image (main display device 41, first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44),
Image information storage means (memory module 83) for storing image data in advance;
An instruction control means (production CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of the image displayed on the display means,
The image data is stored in accordance with the content instructed by the instruction information (main first frame area 114, main second frame area 115, sub first frame area 117, sub second frame area 118). ), display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display means includes a first display means (first sub display device 43) and a second display means (second sub display device 44),
The instruction control means includes, as the instruction information, information specifying the image data to be used for displaying an image on the first display means and a use target for displaying an image on the second display means. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of providing aggregate instruction information (drawing list shown in FIG. 35) that is set by aggregating both of the information designating the image data.

According to the feature H1, information for displaying an image on the plurality of display units is provided to the display control unit in a state of being aggregated in the aggregation instruction information. As a result, the number of instruction information provided from the instruction control unit to the display control unit can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the instruction information is individually provided to each of the plurality of display units.

Features H2. The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein information for displaying an image on each of the first display unit and the second display unit at the same update timing is set in the aggregation instruction information. ..

According to the feature H2, since the information for displaying the image on each display unit is set in the aggregation instruction information at the same update timing, the display control unit is set to all the aggregation instruction information. Information may be treated as information for displaying an image at one update timing, and it is not necessary to execute a process for determining which update timing corresponds to the plurality of different update timings. .. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing executed by the display control means using the aggregation instruction information.

Features H3. In the instruction information, a plurality of the image data is designated as a use target,
The display control means stores the plurality of pieces of the image data specified as use targets in the instruction information in the order according to the setting order information (display order priority data) set in the instruction information, for the setting storage. It is a configuration that is sequentially set to the means,
In the aggregation instruction information, it is the setting order as to whether the image data designated as a use target is data for displaying an image on which of the first display unit and the second display unit. The gaming machine described in the feature H1 or H2, which is specified by using information.

According to the characteristic H3, which display means corresponds to which image data is designated as a use target by using the setting order information for specifying the setting order of the image data by the display control means. Specified. This eliminates the need to set dedicated information for designating the type of display means to be set in the aggregation instruction information, so that it is possible to reduce the number of types of information set in the aggregation instruction information. ..

Features H4. The setting order information corresponding to the image data to be used for displaying an image on the first display unit in the aggregation instruction information is information group of a first order range (first display target reference value or more The setting order information included in the second display target reference value) and corresponding to the image data to be used for displaying the image on the second display unit in the aggregation instruction information is the second order range. The gaming machine according to feature H3, which is included in the information group (a value equal to or greater than the second display target reference value).

According to the feature H4, in the configuration in which the type of the display means to be set is designated using the setting order information, the display order corresponds to which display means the image data designated as the usage target corresponds to. Clearly differentiated in information. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for the display control means to specify the type of display means to be set.

Features H5. The instruction control unit includes an instruction information creating unit (a function of executing a drawing list creation process in the effect CPU 82) that creates the instruction information by referring to a reference information group (execution target table for display control),
In the reference information group, as information for identifying the type of the image data to be used in the instruction information creating unit, type information (display target data) corresponding to the type of the display unit to be displayed, Individual order information (display order data) corresponding to the setting order in the setting storage means in the plurality of types of image data to be used in the display means to be displayed is set,
The gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4, wherein the instruction information creating means derives the setting order information based on the type information and the individual order information.

According to the characteristic H5, the setting order information is not set as it is in the reference information group, but the type information and the individual order information are set, and the setting order information is used by using the type information and the individual order information. Is derived. Thus, when setting the reference information group at the game machine designing stage, it is only necessary to set the type of display means to be set and the setting order in a plurality of types of image data to be used on the display means. , It is not necessary to set the final setting order information. Therefore, the design work can be facilitated.

Features H6. The instruction information creating unit executes predetermined arithmetic processing (processing of step S1305 and step S1306 in the effect CPU 82) on the numerical information corresponding to the individual order information by using the numerical information corresponding to the type information. The gaming machine according to Feature H5, wherein the numerical value information derived by the predetermined arithmetic processing is set as the setting order information.

According to the feature H6, when the setting order information is derived using the type information and the individual order information set in the reference information group, a predetermined arithmetic process is executed using the type information and the individual order information. Therefore, the processing load for deriving the setting order information can be reduced.

For any one of the features H1 to H6, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, the features I1 to I9, the features J1 to J3, and the features K1 to K8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the characteristic E group, the characteristic F group, the characteristic G group, and the characteristic H group, the following problems can be solved.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. Predetermined display means (first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44) for displaying an image,
Displacement drive control means for displacing the predetermined display means (function of executing the process of step S303 in the distribution-side MPU 73),
Display control means for performing display control of the predetermined display means (production CPU 82, production LSI 85),
Equipped with
The display control means is a displacement corresponding image (rotation period image 153) in which it is difficult for the player to identify that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement operation in the situation where the predetermined display means is performing the predetermined displacement operation. ) Is displayed on the predetermined display means, a displacement-corresponding control means (function for executing the processing of steps S1810 to S1812 in the effect CPU 82, 2D control section 96, 3D control section 97) is provided. Machine.

According to the characteristic I1, the displacement corresponding image is displayed on the predetermined display means, which makes it difficult for the player to identify that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement operation in the situation where the predetermined display means is performing the predetermined displacement operation. It This makes it possible to cause a situation in which the predetermined display means is displaced without the player's knowledge, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature I2. The predetermined displacement operation is a predetermined rotation operation in the predetermined display means,
The game machine according to feature I1, wherein the displacement corresponding image is an image having no directivity in a direction along the display surface of the predetermined display means.

According to the characteristic I2, the displacement corresponding image is an image having no directivity in the direction along the display surface of the predetermined display means, so that the predetermined display means can display the predetermined display means in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing a predetermined rotation operation. By displaying the displacement corresponding image, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to identify that the predetermined display means is rotating.

Feature I3. The game machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the displacement corresponding image is displayed so that the player recognizes that the image is displayed on a non-displacement display surface.

According to the characteristic I3, the displacement corresponding image is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being displayed on the non-displaced display surface, so that the player is informed that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement operation. It is possible to make it difficult to identify.

More specifically, regarding the configuration of the feature I3, “the displacement corresponding image is a member that does not follow the predetermined display means around the predetermined display means when the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. It is displayed so that the display orientation in the relationship of "is not changed."

Feature I4. A specific display means (main display device 41) for displaying an image is provided,
The predetermined display means includes a display surface of the specific display means and a display surface of the predetermined display means from the front of the gaming machine at a position facing a part of the display surface of the specific display means in a direction facing the display surface. Both of which are configured to perform the predetermined displacement operation in a predetermined posture that allows visual recognition,
When the predetermined display means is performing the predetermined displacement operation, the displacement-corresponding control unit is configured to display the displacement-corresponding image in an area around the display surface of the predetermined display unit on the display surface of the specific display unit. The game machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that an image corresponding to is displayed.

According to the characteristic I4, in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing a predetermined displacement operation, a part of the display surface of the specific display means exists around the display surface of the predetermined display means, and one of the display surfaces is In the area of the part, an image corresponding to the displacement corresponding image on the predetermined display means is displayed. This makes it possible to display an image having a relationship with the displacement corresponding image displayed on the predetermined display means around the predetermined display means performing the predetermined displacement operation, and the predetermined display means and the specific display means. In, it is possible to perform an integrated display effect.

Feature I5. The predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation in a situation in which the predetermined display means is arranged at a position where the display surface of the specific display means exists over the entire periphery of the display surface of the predetermined display means. The gaming machine described in Feature I4.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to make the player illusion that the display surface of the predetermined display means is a partial area of the display surface of the specific display means, and the fact that the predetermined display means is performing a displacement operation is played. It becomes easy to display an image that is difficult for a person to recognize.

Feature I6. When the predetermined display means is performing the predetermined displacement operation, the predetermined correspondence control means, as the displacement correspondence image, straddles the boundary between the display surface of the specific display means and the display surface of the predetermined display means. The game machine according to feature I4 or I5, characterized in that an image having continuity is displayed on the specific display means and the predetermined display means.

According to the feature I6, the image of the specific display unit displayed around the predetermined display unit and the image displayed on the predetermined display unit are displayed so as to have continuity, and therefore attention should be paid to those images. It becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement operation.

Features I7. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, wherein the arrangement state of the predetermined display means is different at the timing of starting the predetermined displacement operation and the timing of ending the predetermined displacement operation.

According to the characteristic I7, the predetermined display means performs the displacement operation in the situation where the displacement corresponding image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement operation is displayed, and the predetermined display means is arranged. Is different, it is expected that the player recognizes that the arrangement state of the predetermined display means has been changed without noticing, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

Feature I8. The display control means displays on the predetermined display means an image (a parallel arrangement period image 152) in which the player can easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means before the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. And means for displaying on the predetermined display means an image (separation period image 154) in which the player can easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means after the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. The gaming machine according to Feature I7, which is provided with a function of the CPU 82 that executes the processes of Steps S1806 to S1808 and Steps S1814 to S1816, the 2D control unit 96, and the 3D control unit 97).

According to the characteristic I8, an image in which the player can easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means before and after the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation is displayed on the predetermined display means, and the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. In such a situation, the displacement display image is displayed on the predetermined display means, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement operation. This makes it possible to give the player a strong impression that the arrangement state of the predetermined display means has been changed without noticing it.

Feature I9. A first display means (first sub display device 43) and a second display means (second sub display device 44) as the predetermined display means,
The displacement drive control means causes the first display means and the second display means to start the predetermined displacement operation in a state where the first display means and the second display means are arranged in parallel in a predetermined direction, and The game according to any one of features I1 to I8, characterized in that the predetermined displacement operation is ended in a state in which the first display means and the second display means are juxtaposed in a direction different from the predetermined direction. Machine.

According to the feature I9, the first display means and the second display means are arranged in different directions before and after the predetermined displacement operation. In this case, since the displacement corresponding image is displayed in the situation where the predetermined displacement operation is being performed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the first display means and the second display means are performing the predetermined displacement operation. .. As a result, it is expected that the player recognizes that the direction in which the first display means and the second display means are arranged side by side without knowing it, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

For any one of the features I1 to I9, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, the features I1 to I9, the features J1 to J3, and the features K1 to K8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. Predetermined display means (first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44) for displaying an image,
Rotation drive control means for rotating the predetermined display means (function of executing the process of step S303 in the distribution-side MPU 73),
Display control means for performing display control of the predetermined display means (production CPU 82, production LSI 85),
Equipped with
The display control means causes the predetermined display means to display a ring-shaped notification image (right-side notification image 143 on the sub side) in which notification character images are annularly arranged (right-side notification in effect CPU 82). A game machine having a function of executing a setting process for a 2D control unit 96, a 3D control unit 97).

According to the feature J1, it is possible to give the player a surprise by rotating the predetermined display means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the character image for notification is arranged in a ring shape. This allows the player to recognize the content of the character image for notification even when the predetermined display means is performing a specific rotation operation.

Features J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the ring notification control unit displays the ring notification image as if it is rotating.

According to the feature J2, the ring-shaped notification image is displayed as if it is rotating. Therefore, no matter which position the rotation position of the predetermined display means is, the ring-shaped notification image is displayed in the predetermined display direction. Can be visually recognized.

Features J3. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the ring-shaped notification control unit changes the rotation display mode of the ring-shaped notification image according to the operation mode of the rotation operation on the predetermined display unit.

According to the feature J3, since the rotation display mode of the ring-shaped notification image is changed according to the rotation mode of the predetermined display unit, whichever mode the rotation mode of the predetermined display unit is, It is possible to make the display content of the notification image easy to recognize by the player.

For any one of the features J1 to J3, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, the features I1 to I9, the features J1 to J3, and the features K1 to K8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. A specific display means (main display device 41) for displaying an image,
Predetermined display means (first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44) for displaying an image,
Displacement control means for displacing the predetermined display means to a predetermined facing position facing a part of the display surface of the specific display means from the direction in which the display surface faces (function of executing the process of step S303 in the distribution-side MPU 73). )When,
The specific notification image (abnormality notification image 176) is displayed in the specific display when a notification target event occurs in a situation where the displacement control means is controlled so that the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined opposed position. Notification control means to be displayed on the means (function for executing the processing of step S2008 to step S2012 in the effect CPU 82, 2D control section 96, 3D control section 97),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature K1, the specific notification image when the notification target event occurs is displayed on the specific display unit even in the situation where the control is executed such that the predetermined display unit is arranged at the predetermined facing position. .. As a result, even if the predetermined display means is not arranged at the predetermined facing position due to some failure, the specific notification image is displayed on the specific display means, and the specific notification image is displayed to the player or the manager of the game hall. It becomes possible to recognize.

Features K2. When the notification target event occurs in a situation where the predetermined display unit is arranged at the predetermined facing position, the notification control unit is provided in an area that does not face the predetermined display unit on the display surface of the specific display unit. The gaming machine according to Feature K1, wherein at least a part of the specific notification image is displayed.

According to the characteristic K2, it is possible to prevent the specific notification image from being completely hidden by the predetermined display means. This makes it possible to ensure the visibility of the specific notification image displayed on the specific display unit even in the situation where the predetermined display unit is arranged at the predetermined opposing position.

Features K3. The displacement control means is for displacing the predetermined display means so that the predetermined opposed position changes in a predetermined displacement period,
When the notification target event occurs in the predetermined displacement period, the notification control unit is an area on the display surface of the specific display unit that does not face the predetermined display unit over the entire predetermined displacement period. The game machine according to feature K2, wherein the specific notification image is displayed.

According to the characteristic K3, the specific notification image is displayed in the area that does not face the predetermined display means over the entire predetermined displacement period, so that the display position of the specific notification image is changed according to the position of the predetermined display means. It is possible to ensure the visibility of the specific notification image displayed on the specific display unit without performing control such as changing the.

Features K4. There are multiple types of the notification target event,
The specific notification image has a plurality of types corresponding to the notification target event,
Features K1 to K3 characterized in that the notification control means limits the number of the specific notification images to be displayed to a predetermined number when the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined facing position. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the characteristic K4, in the situation where the area for displaying the specific notification image on the specific display means is limited, the number of the specific notification images to be displayed is limited to a predetermined number. It is possible to secure the size of the specific notification image to be displayed to some extent.

Features K5. A plurality of types of the notification target event has a priority set as a display target of the specific notification image,
When the number of the notification target events exceeding the predetermined number has occurred in the situation where the predetermined display unit is arranged at the predetermined opposed position, the notification control unit is configured to perform the notification target on the higher priority side. The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the specific notification image corresponding to an event is displayed.

According to the characteristic K5, even if the number of specific notification images to be displayed is limited to a predetermined number in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at a predetermined facing position, the notification target on the higher priority side It is possible to display the specific notification image corresponding to the event.

Features K6. The notification control means causes the predetermined display means to display a predetermined notification image (common notification image 175) when the notification target event occurs in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined facing position. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5.

According to the characteristic K6, not only the specific notification image is displayed on the specific display means but also the predetermined notification image is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that it is possible to emphasize that the notification target event has occurred. Become.

Features K7. The gaming machine according to Feature K6, wherein the predetermined notification image is a common image that does not correspond to the type of the notification target event.

According to the characteristic K7, the predetermined display means does not display the image corresponding to the type of the notification target event but displays the common image not corresponding to the type of the notification target event as the predetermined notification image, thereby performing the predetermined display. It is possible to reduce the processing load for displaying the predetermined notification image on the means.

Features K8. The gaming machine according to feature K6 or K7, wherein the notification control unit causes the predetermined display unit to display only one predetermined notification image even when the number of times the notification target event occurs is a plurality of times. ..

According to the characteristic K8, even if the number of occurrences of the notification target event is a plurality of times, only one predetermined notification image is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that an image other than the predetermined notification image is displayed on the predetermined display means. It is possible to secure a wide area to be covered.

Note that, for any one of the configurations of the features K1 to K8, the features A1 to A11, the features B1 to B7, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E11, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G10. Any one or more of the features H1 to H6, the features I1 to I9, the features J1 to J3, and the features K1 to K8 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the characteristic I group, the characteristic J group, and the characteristic K group, the following problems can be solved.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device by using the image data read from the memory. Becomes

Here, in the gaming machine as illustrated above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the starting operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine which gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped patterns.

10... Pachinko machine, 41... Main display device, 43... First sub display device, 44... Second sub display device, 73... Allocation side MPU, 82... Performance CPU, 83... Memory module, 85... Performance LSI , 86... VRAM, 92... Transfer controller, 93... Register, 94... Advance transfer control section, 95... Movie decoder, 96... 2D control section, 97... 3D control section, 114... Main first frame area, 115... Main Second frame area 117, first sub-frame area 118, second sub-frame area 118, sub-storage area 121, pre-transfer storage area 121a to 121t, first to twentieth storage areas before transfer 122,... Storage area for post-transfer, 125... Search table, 128... Index table, 143... Sub-right hitting notification image, 152... Parallel period image, 153... Rotation period image, 154... Separation period image, 175... Common notification image, 176... Abnormality notification image, 185... Special moving image data.

Claims (1)

A predetermined display means for displaying an image,
Displacement drive control means for displacing the predetermined display means,
Display control means for performing display control of the predetermined display means,
Equipped with
In the situation where the predetermined display means is performing a predetermined displacement operation, the display control means displays on the predetermined display means a displacement corresponding image in which it is difficult for the player to identify that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement operation. A game machine comprising a displacement-corresponding control means for displaying.

Images